You are on page 1of 142

by training with those who already are

expert
become
an
Thank you for your interest in Award
Solutions technology training and professional
services. We look forward to working with you
to provide excellent training and service solu-
tions designed to meet your needs.
About this Catalog
The Award Solutions Course Catalog contains
an overview of our company and services,
course descriptions for both Instructor led and
eLearning delivery methods, and additional
logistical information.
Let us help you or your team become an
expert in wireless and IP technologies. Simply
go straight to a curriculum, or browse through
the catalog to view the comprehensive training
solutions and professional services offered by
Award Solutions.
Updates
Award Solutions believes in maintaining our
training courses on the cutting-edge and at the
highest quality. As a result, the course descrip-
tions in this catalog are subject to change. In
addition, new course descriptions are added to
curriculums throughout the year. Please visit
Awards website at www.awardsolutions.com or
contact us at +1 972-664-0727 x306 or call us at
1-877-472-9273 x306 for the latest information.
Introduction
1
expert
become
an
by training with those who already are
Table of Contents
Introduction ............................................................................................... 1
Table of Contents ........................................................................................ 2
Company Overview ...................................................................................... 7
Meeting Your Needs ............................................................................................................ 8
Our Approach to Training ..................................................................................................... 9
Instructor led Onsite Training ................................................................................................ 10
Instructor led Webinars ....................................................................................................... 11
Self-paced eLearning .......................................................................................................... 12
Lunch & Learn Seminars and Public Courses ............................................................................... 13
Network Performance Workshops ............................................................................................ 14
Custom Learning Solutions (CLS) ............................................................................................ 15
Professional Services .................................................................................... 17
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 17
New Product Introduction Service Line ..................................................................................... 18
Network Design & Optimization Service Line .............................................................................. 19
APC Service Line ............................................................................................................... 20
Acceptance Testing Service Line ............................................................................................ 21
Competitive Analysis Service Line ........................................................................................... 22
Consulting & Staff Augmentation Service Line ............................................................................ 23
Recommended Course Flows .......................................................................... 25
Executives, Sales & Marketing ............................................................................................... 26
Emerging Trends ................................................................................................................ 27
WiMAX............................................................................................................................ 28
IP Convergence ................................................................................................................. 29
1x & 1xEV-DO for Operators .................................................................................................. 30
1x & 1xEV-DO for Vendors .................................................................................................... 31
GSM & GPRS/EDGE for Operators ............................................................................................ 32
GSM & GPRS/EDGE for Vendors .............................................................................................. 33
UMTS (WCDMA) for Operators ................................................................................................ 34
UMTS (WCDMA) for Vendors .................................................................................................. 35
Emerging Trends Curriculum ........................................................................... 37
Instructor led
OFDM Fundamentals .......................................................................................................... 38
The Wireless Landscape: Beyond 3G *NEW* ............................................................................... 39
4G Technology Overview ...................................................................................................... 40
Advanced Antenna Technologies for WiMAX *NEW* ....................................................................... 41
WiMAX Access Network Planning and Design .............................................................................. 42
Mastering UMTS LTE ............................................................................................................ 43
Mastering UMTS LTE Protocols & Signaling *NEW* ........................................................................ 44
(e) Self-paced eLearning course
2
by training with those who already are
expert
become
an
Emerging Trends Curriculum (continued)
Self-paced eLearning
Overview of OFDM (e) ........................................................................................................ 45
Multiple Antenna Technologies (e) *NEW* ................................................................................ 46
WiMAX Curriculum ...................................................................................... 47
Instructor led
WiMAX Essentials .............................................................................................................. 48
Exploring WiMAX .............................................................................................................. 49
Advanced Antenna Technologies for WiMAX *NEW* ...................................................................... 50
Mobile WiMAX Access Network Signaling *NEW* ......................................................................... 51
WiMAX Access Network Planning and Design .............................................................................. 52
Mobile WiMAX Core Networks *NEW* ...................................................................................... 53
Self-paced eLearning
Overview of OFDM (e) ........................................................................................................ 54
Overview of WiMAX (e) ....................................................................................................... 55
Multiple Antenna Technologies (e) *NEW* ................................................................................. 56
1x &1xEV-DO Curriculum .............................................................................. 57
Instructor led
Mastering 1x Networks and Signaling ...................................................................................... 58
1x Radio Networks Performance Workshop ............................................................................... 59
1x RF Technicians Workshop *NEW* ........................................................................................ 60
1xEV-DO Essentials ............................................................................................................ 61
Mastering 1xEV-DO Networks & Signaling (Rev A) ....................................................................... 62
Mastering 1xEV-DO Networks & Signaling (Rev 0 & A) .................................................................. 63
Mastering 1xEV-DO Radio Networks (Rev B) .............................................................................. 64
Mastering UMB Networks ..................................................................................................... 65
1xEV-DO RF Mentoring (Rev 0 & A) *NEW* ................................................................................ 66
1xEV-DO RF Technicians Workshop *NEW* ................................................................................ 67
Mobile IP in 1x/1xEV-DO Networks ......................................................................................... 68
MMD (IMS) in 1x/1xEV-DO Networks ........................................................................................ 69
VoIP and SIP in 1x/1xEV-DO MMD Networks ............................................................................... 70
Self-paced eLearning
Overview of CDMA2000 Networks (e) ...................................................................................... 71
CDMA2000 Air Interface (e) .................................................................................................. 72
CDMA2000 Packet Data Networks (e) ...................................................................................... 73
Mobile IP for CDMA2000 (e) ................................................................................................. 74
1xEV-DO Networks (e) ........................................................................................................ 75
1xEV-DO Networks (Rev A) (e) ............................................................................................... 76
Overview of MMD (IMS) in 1x/1xEV-DO Networks (e) .................................................................... 77
(e) Self-paced eLearning course
3
expert
become
an
by training with those who already are
GSM & GPRS/EDGE Curriculum ........................................................................ 79
Instructor led
Exploring GSM ................................................................................................................. 80
GSM Performance Workshop ................................................................................................. 81
AMR Performance Workshop ................................................................................................. 82
Exploring GPRS and EDGE .................................................................................................... 83
Mastering GPRS and EDGE ................................................................................................... 84
GPRS and EDGE Performance Workshop ................................................................................... 85
Wireless Internet - From IP to EDGE & UMTS/HSPA ...................................................................... 86
Self-paced eLearning
Overview of GPRS (e) ......................................................................................................... 87
GPRS Air Interface (e) ........................................................................................................ 88
GPRS Packet Data Operations (e) ........................................................................................... 89
GPRS Mobility (e) .............................................................................................................. 90
UMTS (WCDMA - R99 to R8) Curriculum ............................................................ 91
Instructor led
UMTS Essentials (R99 to R8) ................................................................................................. 92
Exploring UMTS (WCDMA) .................................................................................................... 93
Mastering UMTS (WCDMA) Radio Networks ................................................................................ 94
Mastering UMTS Radio Networks & Signaling (R99) ...................................................................... 95
Exploring HSPA+ (R7) *NEW* ................................................................................................ 96
Mastering HSPA Networks & Signaling (R5 & R6) *NEW* ................................................................ 97
Mastering UMTS Core Networks (R99 to R7) .............................................................................. 98
UMTS LTE Essentials *NEW* ................................................................................................. 99
Mastering UMTS LTE ........................................................................................................... 100
Mastering UMTS LTE Protocols & Signaling *NEW* ....................................................................... 101
WCDMA RF Mentoring (R99 to R5) *NEW* ................................................................................. 102
IMS in UMTS Networks ........................................................................................................ 103
Wireless Internet - From IP to EDGE & UMTS/HSPA ...................................................................... 104
Self-paced eLearning
Evolution from GSM to UMTS (e) ............................................................................................ 105
Multiple Antenna Technologies (e) *NEW* ................................................................................ 106
Overview of UMTS (e) ........................................................................................................ 107
UMTS/WCDMA Air Interface Fundamentals (e) ........................................................................... 108
UMTS Signaling (e) ............................................................................................................ 109
UMTS Mobility (e) ............................................................................................................. 110
HSDPA (R5) (e) ................................................................................................................. 111
HSUPA (R6) (e) ................................................................................................................. 112
Overview of UMTS LTE (e) ................................................................................................... 113
(e) Self-paced eLearning course
4
by training with those who already are
expert
become
an
Wireless Fundamentals Curriculum ................................................................. 115
Instructor led
Wireless and 3G Basics ....................................................................................................... 116
Wireless Technologies and Networks Overview ........................................................................... 117
Wi-Fi-Essentials ............................................................................................................... 118
3G Comparative Overview ................................................................................................... 119
Self-paced eLearning
Overview of 3G Wireless Networks (e) ..................................................................................... 120
Wi-Fi Overview (e) ........................................................................................................... 121
IP Convergence Curriculum ........................................................................... 123
Instructor led
ATM and IP Fundamentals *NEW* ........................................................................................... 124
IP Convergence Essentials *NEW* .......................................................................................... 125
Exploring IPv6 ................................................................................................................. 126
Voice and Video over IP Protocols and Technologies *NEW* ............................................................ 127
Exploring MPLS *NEW* ....................................................................................................... 128
SIP Signaling ................................................................................................................... 129
Exploring IMS *NEW* .......................................................................................................... 130
IMS in UMTS Networks ........................................................................................................ 131
VoIP and SIP in 1x/1xEV-DO MMD Networks ............................................................................... 132
Self-paced eLearning
Welcome to IP Networking (e) .............................................................................................. 133
Overview of MPLS (e) ......................................................................................................... 134
Multiple Antenna Technologies (e) *NEW* ................................................................................ 135
IP Convergence Overview (e) *NEW* ....................................................................................... 136
Overview of IMS (e) *NEW* .................................................................................................. 137
Voice and Video over IP (VoIP) Overview (e) *NEW* ..................................................................... 138
IP Quality of Service (e) ...................................................................................................... 139
Session Initiation Protocol (e) ............................................................................................... 140
Seamless Mobility (e) ......................................................................................................... 141
Overview of MMD (IMS) in 1x/1xEV-DO Networks (e) .................................................................... 142
(e) Self-paced eLearning course
5
expert
become
an
by training with those who already are
6
by training with those who already are
expert
become
an
Company Overview
Award Solutions, Inc. is a knowledge-based
company rooted in the areas of advanced wire-
less and Internet technologies. Our exceptional
services range from technical training using
multiple delivery methods to expert consulting
in various technical disciplines.
Our products and services provide our clientele
with innovative, fexible, and cost-effective
solutions that help boost their productivity. The
level of technical depth in our training courses
gives students a unique beneft that they can
immediately apply. We offer a range of courses
appropriate for audiences needing a high-level
overview, as well as engineers looking for in-
depth details.
Award Solutions continues to provide successful
training and network performance solutions as
well as professional services for many telecom-
munications and Internet equipment manufac-
turers, service providers and enterprises, just
as we have since 1997.
Technical areas of expertise include:
Emerging Trends
WiMAX
1x & 1xEV-DO
GSM & GPRS/EDGE
UMTS (WCDMA)
Wireless Fundamentals
IP Convergence
Our experts understand the various aspects of
these technologies, including:
Radio Technologies (e.g., CDMA, 1xEV-DO,
GPRS/EDGE, WCDMA, WiMAX, OFDM and Wi-
Fi)
Wireless Networking (e.g., GSM, ANSI-41, and
Mobile IP)
IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS), VoIP, and SIP
Mobile Broadcast Services such as DVB-H
Flexibility
Award understands that dynamic times require
us to be fexible and adaptive to your needs.
Our fexibility in content provides you custom-
ized training solutions to meet project-specifc
needs. This saves you time by focusing only on
information relevant to you.
Our fexibility in scheduling offers you training
exactly when and where you need it.
Our fexibility in pricing ensures that you
receive a cost-effective solution without com-
promising the value of our services.
Our fexibility in process allows us to
seamlessly blend in with your well-established
practices.
Expertise
As a knowledge-based company, Award Solu-
tions prides itself in being the expert, and
equipping each client to become an expert
too. Our instructors and consultants are best-
in-class, having achieved substantial industry
experience in areas such as product defnition
and development, network deployment, and
network and systems engineering. We possess
both breadth and depth of knowledge, allowing
us to bring the big picture view as well as the
technical details.
We Promise
Delivery Quality Flexibility
Excellent Return on Investment
7
expert
become
an
by training with those who already are
Whether you are a training manager looking to
train others or a technical individual looking to
enhance your skills, Award Solutions can meet
your technology training needs.
Training Your Organization?
Flexibility is the key to meeting your train-
ing needs. We make scheduling a breeze our
training days and our travel plans are fexible.
We also offer fexibility within our course con-
tent. Our instructors can deliver customized
courses to meet the specifc needs of your
target audience.
In addition, we offer a multitude of delivery
methods:
Instructor led Onsite Training: The best
solution for technology courses
Instructor led Webinars: A
cost-effective alternative to onsite training,
without losing the benefts of a live instructor
Instructor led Public Training: An alter-
native to onsite training for individuals or
small groups of professionals who need the
fexibility in dates and locations
Performance Workshops: A mix of class-
room training and hands-on applications of
the concepts learned in class
Self-Paced eLearning: A fexible, cost-
effective solution, allowing your team to take
training at their own pace when their
schedule permits
Lunch & Learn: A great way to sample
our instructor led courses or keep up with
emerging technologies
Training Yourself?
Our training solutions continue to be selected
because of our devotion to using experts when
creating and teaching courses.
Our consultants have relevant industry expe-
rience designing systems, implementing soft-
ware, testing and optimizing networks. They
bring invaluable knowledge into the classroom,
because they can relate the theory to real-
world experiences.
Not only do our experts understand the tech-
nology, they know how to teach emphasizing
the key points, repeating whats important,
and bringing in analogies and examples as
needed. They make sure you learn what you
came to learn.
Award Solutions also keeps a fnger on the pulse
of the industry, always researching new tech-
nologies, and keeping up with existing ones. We
are constantly updating our curriculums to stay
on the cutting edge with changes to existing
courses and the addition of new courses.
Instructor led Onsite Training
Instructor led Public Training

Instructor led Webinar Training

Self-paced eLearning
Lunch & Learn

UMTS (WCDMA) ILT Course
GPRS Air Interface eLearning Course
Meeting Your Needs
8
by training with those who already are
expert
become
an
Our Approach to Training
Self-paced eLearning
With our eLearning courses, we bring the best
of our instructor led training to the eLearning
environment. Knowing that the experience of
taking a self-paced learning course is different
from a classroom course, we employ what we
call the Adaptive eLearning approach,
modeled after our proven CAF approach.
In our Adaptive eLearning approach:
We adapt our course content philosophy from
CAF, showing learners the big picture and
bringing in relevant details.
We adapt review methods from our instruc-
tor led philosophies using summaries and
review questions.
We adapt to the nature of the self-paced
environment by using frequent interactions
ranging from review questions to humor to
keep the learner engaged.
The courses use a variety of multimedia
facilities which makes them suitable for
every learning style. Learners also have
control over when and how they cover the
course material.
We structure our eLearning courses into
shorter Knowledge Knuggets. Learners
can come and go as schedules permit,
while minimizing the course material they
have to revisit. In the eLearning CAF,
smaller Knuggets are easier to digest!
By incorporating time-tested concepts from the
classroom with the multimedia and interactiv-
ity available through software, our eLearning
courses provide a rich and individual learning
experience.
Instructor led
Award Solutions instructor led onsite and vir-
tual classroom training philosophy is centered
around the CAF method, where we bring
you Content, Analogies, Flexibility, and Exper-
tise.
Content: Our focus has always been on provid-
ing the in-depth technical content thats valu-
able to the students. Going beyond the facts,
we pull the details together to explain how
they relate, why one option was chosen over
another, and other technologies that need to be
considered.
Analogies: We also concentrate on various
ways to simplify complex technologies so they
are easier for students to grasp. Analogies in
our courses are abundant and easy to compre-
hend, relating concepts to real-life scenarios. It
makes learning simple and fun.
Flexibility: All clients needs are not the
same, so fexibility is key to our instructor
led training. We offer customized courses, fex-
ibility in scheduling, the choice of onsite or
virtual classroom training, and other options to
ensure that we can provide the right content
to the right students at the right time. In
addition, Award instructors use the knowledge
they gain during class interactions to direct the
course while it is in progress. We like to say
that every course from Award Solutions is a
custom course.
Expertise: Award Solutions courses are
designed, developed and delivered by our own
industry experts who have a wealth of industry
experience and a passion for teaching. Award
instructors also lend their expertise to Award
Solutions Engineering Services projects, which
keeps their knowledge current, practical and
relevant.
At Award Solutions, we understand that the
instructor led learning environment is different
from a self-paced one. Therefore, we approach
each method from a different angle to meet its
unique requirements. By maximizing the effec-
tiveness of the learning experience, we aim
to give you an excellent return on your invest-
ment.
SIP eLearning Course
9
expert
become
an
by training with those who already are
Instructor led Onsite Training
Award Solutions offers onsite technical courses
in wireless technologies and data communi-
cations. Our courses range from introductory
to advanced levels brimming with technical
details. Our instructors travel to your facility to
engage the students in an interactive learning
experience.
The level of technical depth in our advanced
technology training courses is unique to the
marketplace. Award is known for teaching
beyond the facts. We bring you the big
picture view, and explain the hows and the
whys, along with the factual details. When
they complete a course, our students tell us
they have a good understanding of the tech-
nology, feel that their questions have been
answered, and can immediately apply their
newly acquired knowledge to become more
productive.
Our instructors blend accurate, relevant con-
tent with insightful analogies and a touch of
humor, which provides students with a rich
learning experience. They also tailor the con-
tent during class to the background and experi-
ence of the students. By focusing on areas
important to the audience, they ensure that
the students receive exactly what they need.
Audience
Award Solutions delivers exceptional training
solutions to participants with diverse back-
grounds and expectations. We are able to
delight executives and managers who are inter-
ested in an end-to-end view of the network
architecture as well as design engineers desir-
ing a signifcant level of detail on specifc por-
tions of the network. Together we fnd the best
solution for you and your team.
Benefts of Onsite Training
from Award Solutions
Our instructors are industry experts. They know
and teach the theory as well as the practical
applications. They have worked in the industry,
and continue to apply their expertise as con-
sultants at Award. After completing the course,
students not only understand how the technol-
ogy works, but also how to apply it.
Our course content provides a comprehensive
discussion designed to cover all the technical
information relevant to the topic. At the start
of class, the instructor asks the students what
they expect to learn in the course. During
class, the instructor customizes the presenta-
tion to emphasize the areas of interest to the
audience. This way, the students objectives
are met.
Our courses focus on end-to-end scenarios and
how details ft together to form the big picture.
Our ability to go from the 50,000 foot level
to the nuts and bolts of the technology is an
asset to the students learning experience. This
means they not only learn about this technol-
ogy, but also how it might interact with other
relevant protocols, technologies, etc.
Our instructors use innovative educational
techniques to create an interactive envi-
ronment that promotes discussion and knowl-
edge retention, including:
Guided discussions
Real-world examples, analogies, and
anecdotes
Animated presentations and whiteboard
discussions
Q & A sessions
Students can get their questions answered by
the instructor during class, in one-on-one ses-
sions during breaks, and before/after class.
Customized Solutions
Award Solutions will be happy to customize
our course content to meet your specifc
needs.
We can integrate topics across our courses
to deliver a custom bootcamp to cover
only the information important to you and
your team. These bootcamps are designed
to help teams learn new technologies
quickly.
Bootcamps can vary in length, from 1 day to
5 days, as appropriate to the course mate-
rial.
We can also integrate our training programs
with your product specifc information to
deliver exceptional training solutions for
your customers or employees.
Student Guide
Students receive illustrated course books, con-
sidered by some to be best-in-class. Course
books include the presentation slides and com-
prehensive text explaining the key points.
Additional Support
After course completion, students are invited
to contact the instructors via email with any
questions.
Course Length
Award Solutions offers 1-day, 2-day, and 3-day
courses.
10
by training with those who already are
expert
become
an
Award Solutions realizes onsite training is not
always feasible for our clients. Thats why we
also offer online Webinar courses.
What is a Webinar?
The Webinar format refers to delivering
live training courses over the Internet using
Web-based multimedia tools. From their own
computers, students and instructors can log
in to the server hosting the virtual classroom.
Therefore, students can participate in webinars
from within their natural habitats!
The instructor acts as a moderator with special
privileges to host the session. The instructor
can share the presentation material, promote
discussion, and conduct Q & A reviews. Stu-
dents can also ask questions during the session.
The Webinar environment adds a new dimen-
sion of learning and a different level of inter-
activity that creates an effective solution to
meet your training needs.
Flexible Delivery Options
Award Solutions is fexible and can meet your
requirements when it comes to using the right
online classroom application. In fact, we can
simply integrate our course material with your
preferred solution. We also can provide our
own Web-based classroom solution. Even in
a remote environment, we deliver the same
excellent quality and benefts as an onsite
learning experience.
Benefts of Webinars from
Award Solutions
Award Solutions brings all the benefts of
instructor led onsite training to the Webinar
environment. In addition, the Webinar
technology offers the following advantages.
Clients save on expenses since there are no
instructor and student travel-related costs.
Also, the audience can be geographically
distributed. As a result, productivity and
learning are both maximized.
Content can be delivered based on client
schedules - a few hours a day through the
course of a week is recommended. This allows
students to continue with their work responsi-
bilities without compromising critical training.
The online format enables our instructors to
bring in references live during class. Stu-
dents can view technical standards and Web
references right on their screen.
Training is available to global audiences. With
the right software tools, Webinar classrooms
can be accessed anywhere by anyone with
online access.
Audience
The nature of the Webinar environment is ideal
for audiences working in different geographic
locations. It also suits audiences in the same
location. Students can be in the same train-
ing room while the instructor is at a different
site.
Student Guide
Award Solutions distributes the same illus-
trated course books as with our onsite training.
Students can preview the material before the
course and follow along in the book during the
course for a richer experience.
Additional Support
As with our onsite training, students can email
the instructors with technical questions after
the course.
Course Length
Award Solutions Webinars are customized to
meet student needs.
Standard Courses
Award Solutions standard courses are typically
split into multiple half-day sessions.
Course Overviews
These Webinars provide a compact overview of
current technologies. Typically no longer than
90 minutes, they work well for those who do
not need a lot of detail on a technology, and
for those who eventually need more detail but
want an early look today.
Customized Solutions
Award Solutions offers the same customiz-
able service for a Webinar environment as
for onsite training.
Instructor led Webinars
11
expert
become
an
by training with those who already are
Self-paced eLearning
Award Solutions fexibility in delivery methods
allows us to provide a blended training solu-
tion, offering you the option to choose a format
appropriate to your needs. Thats why each of
Awards course curriculums includes eLearning
offerings in addition to traditional instructor
led courses.
What is an eLearning Course
from Award Solutions?
Designed to accommodate a wide variety of
learning styles, our eLearning courses take full
advantage of the multimedia medium. Each
course provides learners with full audio, nar-
rated text and colorful animations to enhance
the learning experience. Review questions in
a variety of formats test the learners under-
standing throughout each topic. Many courses
also offer the learners an opportunity to dig
deeper into topics. Also, every eLearning
course allows learners to navigate through the
courses according to their own interests and
needs, rather than in a strictly linear fash-
ion.
A scored, comprehensive quiz at the end of
each course allows the learners an opportunity
to assess their understanding. Feedback allows
them to automatically return to content that
needs further study.
Finally, our eLearning courses are designed with
busy schedules in mind. Courses are divided
into topics that the average learner can cover
in 15 minutes or fewer. Learners also have the
training literally at their fngertips; they can
review detailed subjects whenever they want,
and as often as needed, in order to digest all of
the information covered.
eLearning courses from Award Solutions are
fully integrated with leading AICC compliant
Learning Management Systems (LMS). The LMS
allows administrators to keep track of the
learners progress, scores, and the results of
the assessment test.
Benefts of eLearning from
Award Solutions
Award Solutions eLearning courses are rich in
technical content. Courses are written by the
same industry experts who create the instruc-
tor led course material.
Courses are designed for the self-paced multi-
media learning environment and are not just
a translation of our instructor led course mate-
rial. We take advantage of the multimedia fea-
tures to enhance the learning experience for
the learner.
Engaging interactions promote high retention of
course information. They are used throughout
the course to reinforce key points.
Analogies and examples simplify technically
complex concepts.
Illustrations and animations graphically dem-
onstrate the subject matter, bringing diffcult
concepts to life and ultimately making them
easier to understand.
Knowledge Knuggets are topics that typically
take 15 minutes or fewer to complete, allowing
learners to take breaks as needed. The esti-
mated length of each Knugget is displayed in
the course next to the topic name.
Courses can easily be used for reference after
completion.
Audience
Award Solutions eLearning is designed to
target a wide range of learners. Our overview
courses are ideal foundation builders for
design engineers, as well as executives and
managers interested in an end-to-end view of
the network architecture. For those who desire
a greater level of detail on specifc portions
of the network, we offer more advanced fol-
low-up courses (e.g., Radio Networks or Signal-
ing courses).
Delivery Methods
We can deliver courses in CD-ROM format,
place them on your webserver, or integrate
them with your Learning Management System.
Awards eLearning courses are compliant with
the AICC and SCORM Standards for Learning
Management Systems.
Additional Support
Questions related to our eLearning product can
be emailed to info@awardsolutions.com.
Course Length
Award Solutions eLearning courses have differ-
ent lengths, averaging 1 to 4 hours.
eLearning demos are available on our
website at www.awardsolutions.com
12
by training with those who already are
expert
become
an
Public Courses
Do you only have a few individuals or a small
group to train? Consider one of our Public
Courses. Award Solutions offers offsite public
courses. They are some of our most popular
Instructor led courses scheduled in a neutral
venue.
Benefts
Decide when and where you want to
take the course
Save on travel expenses
Share expertise and work experience with
the different participants, making the
course even more interactive
Take advantage of early bird discounts when
making reservations three weeks or more in
advance
Duration
Vary in length from 2 to 3 days.
Lunch & Learn Seminars
Award Solutions offers lunch & learn seminars
for any technology you choose. These short
seminars are an excellent way to help your
team quickly learn the highlights of technolo-
gies.
Some examples include:
4G Technologies
WiMAX
Wi-Fi
OFDM
1xEV-DO UMB
UMTS LTE
UMTS HSDPA/HSUPA
Benefts
We customize our current course material to
provide:
A high-level overview on the topic
Key aspects of cutting-edge technologies
A taste of Awards training curricula
Duration
Customized: 90 minutes to 3 hours.
Lunch & Learn Seminars
and Public Courses
Customized Solutions
Award Solutions will be happy to custom-
ize our Lunch & Learn seminars and public
courses to meet your needs. We can inte-
grate topics to cover only the information
important to you and your team.
If you are interested in arranging a course for your
organization, or if you have any questions regard-
ing lunch & learn seminars or public courses,
please feel free to contact us at +1.877.47.AWARD
or visit our website at www.awardsolutions.com.
WiMAX Lunch & Learn Seminar
13
expert
become
an
by training with those who already are
Network Performance
Workshops
Award Solutions offers various services to help
you in the area of network performance. We
leverage our expertise across multiple wireless
and Internet technologies to defne a Network
Performance Solution for you. Our goal is to
work with you to identify your needs and bring
you a complete solution that will save you time
and money.
Training Solutions
Award Solutions brings together technology
theory explained in classrooms with practical
applications in a hands-on environment through
Performance Workshops.
These Performance Workshops are a mixture of
classroom training and hands-on application of
the concepts learned in class. Workshops are
designed according to your specifc needs.
Below are some examples of Performance
Workshop topics.
CDMA System Performance
1x Radio Networks Performance Workshop
1xEV-DO (Rev 0) Performance Workshop

GSM and GPRS System Performance
GPRS and EDGE Performance Workshop

WCDMA System Performance
UMTS (WCDMA) Performance Workshop

Awards Performance Workshops provide imme-
diate benefts with the instant application of
network knowledge. We teach you whats prac-
tical and show you whats applicable, giving
you maximum beneft for your investment.
Workshops start with a Pre-Workshop Assess-
ment, where our experts work with you to
develop an agenda that addresses your needs.
The classroom Training portion of the work-
shops includes a mix of technology training
to cover prerequisite knowledge, as well as
performance and optimization training. Even in
the classroom, participants are guided through
practical exercises designed to prepare them to
apply what they learn.
After the classroom, our experts work with
the participants to apply their new knowledge
in their specifc environment. The Hands-On
Application phase can take on many different
shapes since it is designed for each client.
An optional Post-Workshop Follow-Up can
engage Awards Performance Solutions services
to address specifc issues.
Award Solutions specializes in delivering public
and on-site training solutions for small, medium
and large companies. If you are interested in
arranging a performance workshop for your orga-
nization, or if you have any questions regard-
ing network performance workshops, please feel
free to contact us at +1.877.47.AWARD x306 or
visit our website at www.awardsolutions.com.
Complete Network Performance Solution
Classroom
Training
Technology
Primer
Technology
Primer Performance &
Optimization
Training
Post Workshop
Follow-Up
Hands-On
Application
14
by training with those who already are
expert
become
an
Custom Learning Solutions (CLS)
One-Stop Extension to Your
Team
Keeping your employees and customers up-to-
date on your products, tools and latest technol-
ogies is crucial for continuing market success.
Award Solutions Custom Learning Solutions
(CLS) offers a broad portfolio of services to as-
sist you in developing, updating and extending
your function-specifc know-how.
As part of our complete solution, we also
provide training and instructor certifcation to
minimize valuable in-house time and resources
while extending your knowledge reach and
maximizing productivity.
Custom Development
Flexible development and training is targeted
at helping with your specifc training needs.
We will work with you to:
Pinpoint your specifc training
requirements
Utilize your processes for seamless
framework and branding
Develop or update course material to meet
your objectives
Offer a variety of delivery methods
(eLearning, Instructor-led, Webinars)
Transfer knowledge to train and certify
your experts (train-the-trainer)
Create assessments for you to measure
your students skill set
Program Benefts
Quick to market
Flexible delivery methods (Instructor led,
eLearning, Webinars)
Versatile - one size does not ft all, but we
ft all size projects
Award Solutions quality
Complete customized solution
Trusted Experts
As an industry leader in wireless technology
training, we can augment your team to extend
your product portfolio or generate a new
curriculum. Our consultants have substantial
wireless industry experience in product
defnition, development, network deployment
and systems engineering. We have proven
experience in creating custom development
solutions for instructor led and eLearning
training. Plus, we have the instructional
design experience to plug in only those pieces
that are important to you.
Your
training
format
Your
processes
and
procedures
Your
product
information
A
w
a
r
d
C
D
S
Seamlessly enhancing
your product portfolio
We possess the breadth
and depth of knowledge
to assist you with all
facets of your portfolio
15
expert
become
an
by training with those who already are
16
by training with those who already are
expert
become
an
P
r
o
f
e
s
s
i
o
n
a
l
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
s
Professional Services
Introduction
Five Phases of Deployment
A typical network deployment goes through fve
phases:
Business and technology planning
Product analysis and selection
Network design
Implementation
Network operations
The Professional Services group of Award Solu-
tions offers services across all these different
phases of network deployment.
Our Consultants
Our consultants have tremendous depth of
knowledge and practical experience in a wide
range of wireless technologies, protocols and
standards, and RF design and optimization
techniques.
Our engineers are experts who solve your net-
work problems, and also mentor your staff so
they can handle similar tasks autonomously in
the future. Knowledge transfer is an inherent
part of every engagement we undertake.
Acceptance Testing Service Line
Helps equipment manufacturers improve net-
work KPIs by performing a detailed analysis of
acceptance test data.
Competitive Analysis Service Line
Offers benchmarking services and competitive
coverage analysis using benchmarking data.
Staff Augmentation and Consulting
Service Line
Helps operators and manufacturers fnd the
right staff to meet their project needs.
Our Service Lines
Here are some of the services Award Solutions
offers to operators as well as manufacturers:
New Product Introduction Service Line
Helps operators make the right choices when
defning their technology roadmap, defning
their technical and inter-operability require-
ments, building business cases, etc.
Network Design and Optimization
Service Line
Helps operators and equipment manufacturers
with network design and planning services as
well as network optimization services.
Turnkey Analysis Service Line
Helps operators extract the most information
from all network and drive test data they col-
lect.

Network Deployment Lifecycle
17
expert
become
an
by training with those who already are
Professional Services
New Product Introduction Service Line
P
r
o
f
e
s
s
i
o
n
a
l
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
s
Need a Solution?
Planning to deploy a new service or feature?
Not sure of your options and the technical and
fnancial implications? Want to develop test/
acceptance plans for new equipment and tech-
nologies? Deploying a new technology and need
help defning the right KPIs? Know you require
tools, but need someone to defne the exhaus-
tive set of requirements for an RFP? Put out
an RFP and need an independent third party
to compare features and functions of different
vendors?
Awards New Product Introduction Service can
help.
How We Can Help
Thanks to our training heritage, we have a
tremendous depth of expertise in all new and
emerging technology areas.
We can help you make intelligent and
informed upgrade decisions. From KPI
defnition to capacity estimates and
vendor selection to defning and execut-
ing test plans, weve got the solution!
Benefts
Reduces total cost of ownership by:
Defning KPIs & best practices
Optimizing capex/opex/performance
tradeoffs
Reduces Time to Market with timely access
to unbiased third party expertise
Our consultants work with technologies from
inception to large-scale deployment.
Our exposure to a new technology begins in
R&D labs and standards bodies and continues
until the deployment/optimization of the tech-
nology in the feld. Our consultants collectively
hold 40 patents in wireless technology. They
have personally designed and built products,
deployed them, and optimized them. They
understand how these products work and how
they are used in the feld. They have a great
grasp of industry standards, their evolution,
the technology choices, strengths and weak-
nesses of specifc brands of equipment, and
deployment/optimization best practices. For
Award, this service is not a fancy add-on. It is
a core competency.
We help carriers make intelligent and informed
network upgrade decisions. We help you under-
stand your architectural options, and help
senior management and fnancial planners
develop capex projections and analyze capex/
opex trade-offs. We help your engineering
and procurement staff collect and document
requirements for an RFP - for network equip-
ment, tools and software. We help evaluate
vendor responses, often by hosting product
demonstrations and feld tests from your poten-
tial suppliers.
Network Deployment Lifecycle
We also help the engineering groups under-
stand functionality and other trade-offs with
different architectures and products. We defne
network KPIs. We develop and execute accep-
tance test plans. We estimate network capacity
required. We help you select vendors and opti-
mize line-item costs. After procurement, we
help defne best deployment practices and
train your staff to make them autonomous in
the management and use of the acquired tech-
nology.
In short, Award is an unbiased and indepen-
dent third party that can help you through the
entire New Product Introduction process. So, if
you are considering offering a new product or
feature, or acquiring new equipment, software
or tools, give us a call!
Highlights
Requirements specifcations
KPI defnitions
Vendor selection
Best practices defnitions and propagation
Target Audience
Core / HQ Engineering groups
Procurement / Supply chain
18
by training with those who already are
expert
become
an
P
r
o
f
e
s
s
i
o
n
a
l
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
s
Professional Services
Network Design & Optimization Service Line
Need a Solution?
Bad KPIs keeping you awake at night? Problems
with call failures or voice quality? Low data
throughput? Adding new sites or network ele-
ments? Or rolling out a whole new network?
Award offers Network Design and Optimization
Services that can help you extract the most
from your capex.
How We Can Help
Our expertise spans all major technologies -
1xRTT, EV-DO, UMTS, and GSM.
Thanks to our training heritage one
of the unique benefts of working with
Award Professional Services is that we
also mentor your staff so they are able
to handle similar tasks autonomously in
the future.
Knowledge transfer is an inherent part
of every engagement we undertake.
We help design and dimension your network,
interact with regulatory and planning/zoning
bodies, and monitor/approve proposed con-
struction changes.

We can help with the identifcation, acquisi-
tion, integration, test, and activation of new
cell sites and existing site changes.
We are tool-agnostic. Our engineers are adept
at using design tools such as PlanetEV, DBPlan-
ner, Asset, etc. to provide you with the most
cost-effective designs.
We also optimize and troubleshoot your net-
work performance. We can analyze the current
performance of your network using protocol
analyzers, network statistics or mobile logs.
We can design the right tests to get to the
root cause of the issue. We can help collect the
data - either network data or drive test data
- and then optimize your network parameters
& antenna tilts to fx problems and boost your
KPIs.
We are fexible with respect to the way we
operate. We are your one-stop shop for all
design and optimizaton work.
Benefts
Quickest time to market
Optimal coverage
Optimal capacity
Optimal performance
On the other hand, if you have already col-
lected drive test/network data, we can help
you analyze it using our proprietary suite of
tools and services called Award Performance
Central (APC).
We believe in our ability to deliver results. In
fact, we are so confdent that we are willing
to be evaluated and paid based on performance
improvement.
Call us if you wish to discuss pay-for-perfor-
mance options. Because at Award, it IS all
about performance!
Highlights
RF design using standard tools
RF Optimization
Target Audience
Market RF Planning Group
Network Deployment Lifecycle
19
expert
become
an
by training with those who already are
Professional Services
APC Service Line
P
r
o
f
e
s
s
i
o
n
a
l
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
s
Need a Solution?
DVDs of benchmarking data lying around gath-
ering dust? Driving the entire network, but
using the data just to tune your models? Wish
you had the time and tools to correlate your
scanner data with your network stats? Know
theres tons of useful information buried in
your drive test & network data, but cant spare
the time to mine it?
Awards APC Service can help.
How We Can Help
To answer the exact question you have requires
expertise in technology, standards, RF, equip-
ment parameters, software and data analysis.
Off-the-shelf tools dont meet your needs.
Finding a single person with all these skills is
unlikely.
Award is not merely satisfed with pro-
viding a long list of recommendations,
rather a set of solutions.
Having a team of people with such depth of
expertise on your staff is not cost-effcient.
Hence the dust on the DVDs!
But this is where Awards Turnkey Analysis Ser-
vice Line comes in handy. Give us those DVDs.
Thanks in part to our training business, we have
a pool of highly specialized resources in every
area imaginable. The Award Turnkey Analysis
Service Line uses Award Performance Central
(APC) to help you extract the most out of your
data. APC converts the prohibitively expensive
into the highly cost-effective. Wonderful!,
you say, but what in the world is APC?
APC is a combination of specialized consulting
services built on top of a set of off-the-shelf
and proprietary post-processing and data-min-
ing tools. APC leverages Awards entire pool of
specialized consultants, programmers and data
analysts to fnd you the exact answers you
need.
We work with you to get a good defnition
of the problem you are trying to solve. We
gather all the relevant network and drive test
data. Using off-the-shelf tools such as Actix
or Windcatcher, or custom tools, our engineers
slice, dice, segregate, aggregate and correlate
data.

Benefts
Improved network KPIs
Better leveraging of investments in data
collection
Cost-effective analysis of data
Our software developers and data miners work
with our RF and Network engineers to rapidly
develop the analytics to answer your key ques-
tions. The net result? Highly cost-effective
custom analyses.
Ask that really hard question. Demand that
custom analysis. Awards Turnkey Analysis Ser-
vice will work with you to fnd that answer.
Highlights
Analysis & recommendation for any drive test
& network data.
Such as:
- Benchmarking drives
- Model tuning drives
- Troubleshooting drives
- Shakedown drives
Target Audience
Market RF engineering teams
Core network team
Network Deployment Lifecycle
20
by training with those who already are
expert
become
an
P
r
o
f
e
s
s
i
o
n
a
l
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
s
Professional Services
Acceptance Testing Service Line
Need a Solution?
Markets going commercial simultaneously? Mil-
lions of dollars at stake if KPIs are not met?
Only 3 months to boost KPIs for conditional
acceptance? Not enough qualifed staff to ana-
lyze the data coming in from multiple markets?
Awards Acceptance Testing Service can help.
How We Can Help
Awards Acceptance Testing Service is geared
toward Equipment Manufacturers deploying
new technologies such as UMTS, HSDPA, and
EV-DO. We can cost-effectively analyze all the
network and drive test data you collect during
an Acceptance Test drive.
APC leverages Awards entire pool of
specialized consultants, programmers
and data analysts to cost effectively
analyze the data you collect.
We combine network stats, mobile logs, net-
work confguration data and site databases to
analyze instances of pilot pollution, access fail-
ures and call drops.
We look at voice as well as data calls, and then
come up with highly actionable recommenda-
tions to improve your KPIs.
The Award Acceptance Testing Service Line uses
Award Performance Central (APC) to help you
extract the most out of your data.
APC is a combination of specialized consulting
services built on top of a set of off-the-shelf
and proprietary post-processing and data-min-
ing tools. APC leverages Awards entire pool of
specialized consultants, programmers and data
analysts to cost effectively analyze the data
you collect.
We have numerous 3G experts on staff. Using
their help, we have defned a standard optimi-
zation report. We get your feedback on the
standard report and customize it to your needs.
We deploy exactly the right resources to cost-
effectively analyze the data that comes in.
Benefts
Improved network KPIs
Better leveraging of investments in data
collection
Cost-effective analysis of data
We then present you with our recommendations
for equipment parameter changes and antenna
tilts, supported by rigorous data analysis. The
net result? Your engineers spend more time
making fxes instead of wallowing in gigabytes
of data.
So rest easy! Awards Acceptance Test Service
can provide you with a cost effective way to
improve your KPIs and win conditional accep-
tances.
Highlights
Root cause analysis of identifed problems
List of problem areas (coverage, drops,
quality)
Target Audience
Market RF engineering teams
Network Deployment Lifecycle
21
expert
become
an
by training with those who already are
Professional Services
Competitive Analysis Service Line
P
r
o
f
e
s
s
i
o
n
a
l
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
s
Need a Solution?
Think your network is the best in the market
but not sure how to prove it? Your sales team
telling you that the churn is all because of
bad network quality? Know you need to add
sites, but budgets are tight? Want to match
your competitors coverage?
Award Solutions Competitive Analysis Service
Line can help.
How We Can Help
Award is an independent third party that can
objectively compare the performance of your
network with that of your competitors.
If you wish to have a head-to-head com-
parison of your coverage with respect
to your competitors, we can post-pro-
cess your benchmarking data and pro-
vide you with a detailed competitive
analysis.
We drive all major roads in a market to collect
information on call performance, voice quality,
data throughput, and signal strength. We then
give you a detailed, cluster-by-cluster analysis
(stats, charts, maps) of how your networks
performance compares to that of your competi-
tors.
Some of the metrics we will report on are:
Access Failure Rates (blocked call
rates)
Dropped call rates
Coverage (signal strength, Ec/Io and
mobile transmit power for CDMA)
Voice Quality (MOS scores)
Data throughput (uplink and downlink)
Call setup times
Soft handoff (CDMA)
FER Measurements (CDMA)
If you wish to have a head-to-head comparison
of your coverage with your competitors, we
can post-process your benchmarking data and
provide you with a detailed competitive analy-
sis.
Benefts
Better view into competitive position in
market
Redirection of capex/opex resources to
improve your competitive position
So - go ahead - prove to the sales guys that
your network is superior and give them hard
data to start selling! Or build that business
case to justify new capex. Awards Competitive
Analysis Service will provide you with enough
ammunition to do both.
Highlights
Benchmarking drives and reports
Competitive coverage analysis
Technology-specifc and independent
comparisons
Target Audience
RF Engineering Groups
Network Deployment Lifecycle
22
by training with those who already are
expert
become
an
P
r
o
f
e
s
s
i
o
n
a
l
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
s
Professional Services
Consulting & Staff Augmentation Service Line
Need a Solution?
Big project coming up, but no staff to execute
it? Headhunters and websites inundating you
with useless resumes? Tired of screening hun-
dreds of resumes to fnd that one right can-
didate? Sick of dealing with candidates that
are high on resumes but low on skills? Vendors
pointing fngers at each other? Intransigent
problems that have your contractors and ven-
dors stumped?
Awards Consulting & Staff Augmentation Ser-
vice can help.
How We Can Help
Award Solutions has numerous engineers on
staff, and they are the best in industry.
Each placed resource has access to all of
our technology research and standards,
best practices, and tools. In the end,
you receive the resources and solid sup-
port system needed to tackle your most
diffcult projects.
They are routinely involved in getting to the
core of the most complex problems and issues
- ones whose solutions often span multiple net-
work elements and management systems.
Clients use these experts not only to solve
problems, but to assess the competency of
their staff. We also train and mentor engineer-
ing staffs of wireless operators worldwide. This
ensures that our engineers stay at the cutting
edge of technology and design/optimization
techniques.
In addition, Award Solutions also maintains a
large pool of carefully screened contractors.
Before selecting contractors, we put them
through a very rigorous screening process.
We sift through hundreds of resumes a week
to fnd the most qualifed candidates, ensuring
that they are competent and capable of doing
the job.
When you need a resource, an Award subject
matter expert will meet with you to fully
understand your need. We then carefully
match your requirements with our available
resources.
Benefts
Top-notch system-wide expertise to
address your most complex & troublesome
issues
Enhancements to the skill sets of your
teams through on-the-job mentoring
Economical access to technical and busi-
ness expertise to augment your teams.
Award Solutions subject matter experts are
always available for the resources that we
place. Think of this as our Tier 2 support.
During a project, our candidates have access
to all of our technology research and stan-
dards, best practices, tool usage, etc. These
subject matter experts also offer guidance to
the people we have placed. In the end, you
receive the resources and solid support system
needed to tackle your most diffcult projects.
Highlights
Technology planning
Troubleshooting
Deployment
Data analysis
Target Audience
All technical audiences
Network Deployment Lifecycle
23
expert
become
an
by training with those who already are
24
by training with those who already are
expert
become
an
Recommended Course Flows
Course Flows for Engineering
and Operations (Operators and
Equipment Vendors)
Engineering and operations Course Flows
offer more technical depth than those designed
for the Executive or Sales and Marketing
Course Flows.
For product managers, we offer Overview or
Exploring level courses, that contain more
system-level descriptions and include the hows
and the whys of the technology, architecture,
and services. The objective is to help the stu-
dents understand the technology in a well-
rounded manner without going into the bits and
bytes of all the messages and protocols.
The most in-depth engineering courses, or
Mastering level courses, take it a step further
by including all the bits and bytes of the tech-
nical details. These courses are well-suited for
those in system design, system test, systems
engineering, network engineering and product
support.
In addition, Award Solutions offers courses in
some curriculums that focus on performance
and optimization issues. These courses are
designed for personnel involved during and
after systems deployment.
Engineering and Operations courses are typi-
cally 2 to 3 days in length.
Course Flow for Management
and Executives
These courses are designed with the executive
in mind. The focus is on defning the whats
- What is this technology? What are the key
features of this technology? What advantages
does it offer? What makes it different from
other technologies?
These courses also offer a great way for techni-
cal employees to learn the highlights of a dif-
ferent technology.
Executive courses are typically 1 day in length.
Course Flow for Sales and
Marketing
Sales and marketing personnel are most effec-
tive when they know and understand their cus-
tomers needs. Most importantly, they need to
understand the services their customers need.
Our courses not only teach the whats, but
also emphasize the services they enable.
With the complexity of current and emerg-
ing networks, and interworking of wireless
networks and the Internet, sales and market-
ing people are faced with the challenge of
understanding how these new technologies play
together. Award Solutions offers special courses
that start with the basics of IP to build a solid
foundation before studying the more advanced
IP or wireless technologies.
Sales and Marketing courses are typically 1 to
2 days in length.
Training Course Flows
Award Solutions teaches busy professionals
what they need, without the extra fat.
Therefore, we do not use the cookie-cutter
approach, a one-size-fts-all type of course.
Each course is designed for a specifc target
audience. As a result, course topics are care-
fully selected to be relevant to that particular
audience.
Every professional needs different information
to be successful in his/her role. Award
Solutions understands and caters to the
needs of these different roles in various
organizations, such as:
Equipment Vendors (executives and
managers, designers, test and support
teams, sales and marketing, product
line management)
Service Providers (technology development
groups, core engineering, network opera-
tions, feld engineering, sales and
marketing)
Others such as application developers
and integrators, etc.
By recognizing that there are various job func-
tions within these organizations, Award Solu-
tions develops job-function directed courses.
Whether a student is a top-level executive,
a sales and marketing representative, or a
member of the technical team, there is a
course that fts just right for that individual.
Based on these categories, Award Solutions
has developed four recommended course fows.
However, there is no restriction to follow a
specifc course fow. They are simply recom-
mended for your understanding of Award Solu-
tions intent in the fow of knowledge.
Customized Solutions
Award Solutions is happy to customize our
course content to meet your specifc needs.
25
expert
become
an
by training with those who already are
Customized
Bootcamps
Available
We will work with you to find the most suitable course flowfor your team.
Executives, Sales & Marketing
1x & 1xEV-DO
Overview of CDMA2000
Networks
(Self-paced eLearning)
1xEV-DO
Essentials
Instructor led (1 day)
1xEV-DO Networks
(Self-paced eLearning)
The Wireless Landscape:
Beyond 3G
Instructor led (1 day)
IP & Wireless
Fundamentals
ATM and IP Fundamentals
Instructor led (1 day)
Wireless and 3G Basics
Instructor led (1 day)
3G Comparative Overview
Instructor led (1 day)
Welcome to IP
Networking
(Self-paced eLearning)
Emerging Trends
WiMAX Essentials
Instructor led (1 day)
Seamless Mobility
(Self-paced eLearning)
Overview of WiMAX
(Self-paced eLearning)
UMTS LTE Essentials
Instructor led (1 day)
GSM/GPRS/UMTS
Overview of UMTS
(Self-paced eLearning)
Evolution from GSM
to UMTS
(Self-paced eLearning)
Wireless Internet - From
IP to EDGE & UMTS/HSPA
Instructor led (3 day)
Overview of GPRS
(Self-paced eLearning)
UMTS Essentials (R99 to R8)
Instructor led (1 day)
26
by training with those who already are
expert
become
an
Emerging Trends
Customized
Bootcamps
Available
We will work with you to find the most suitable course flowfor your team.
4G Technology Overview
Instructor led (2 day)
Wi-Fi Overview
(Self-paced eLearning)
Wi-Fi Essentials
Instructor led (1 day)
Overview of OFDM
(Self-paced eLearning)
Multiple Antenna
Technologies
(Self-paced eLearning)
OFDM Fundamentals
Instructor led (1 day)
The Wireless Landscape:
Beyond 3G
Instructor led (1 day)
Mastering UMTS LTE
Instructor led (2 day)
Mastering UMB Networks
Instructor led (2 day)
WiMAX Access Network
Planning and Design
Instructor led (3 day)
Mastering UMTS LTE
Protocols & Signaling
Instructor led (2 day)
Advanced Antenna
Technologies for WiMAX
Instructor led (1 day)
27
expert
become
an
by training with those who already are
WiMAX
Overview of WiMAX
(Self-paced eLearning)
Overview of OFDM
(Self-paced eLearning)
Multiple Antenna
Technologies
(Self-paced eLearning)
OFDM Fundamentals
Instructor led (1 day)
Advanced Antenna
Technologies for WiMAX
Instructor led (1 day)
Mobile WiMAX Access
Network Signaling
Instructor led (3 day)
Exploring WiMAX
Instructor led (2 day)
Mobile WiMAX Core Networks
Instructor led (2 day)
Core Network Focus Radio Network Focus
Exploring WiMAX
Instructor led (2 day)
WiMAX Access Network
Planning and Design
Instructor led (3 day)
28
by training with those who already are
expert
become
an
IP Convergence
Exploring IPv6
Instructor led (1 day)
eLearning Courses
IP Quality of Service
(Self-paced eLearning)
ATM and IP Fundamentals
Instructor led (1 day)
Exploring IMS
Instructor led (2 day)
SIP Signaling
Instructor led (2 day)
Session Initiation Protocol
(Self-paced eLearning)
Overview of MMD (IMS)
in 1x/1xEV-DO Networks
(Self-paced eLearning)
IP Convergence Essentials
Instructor led (1 day)
IMS in UMTS Networks
Instructor led (2 day)
Exploring MPLS
Instructor led (2 day)
Seamless Mobility
(Self-paced eLearning)
Overview of MPLS
(Self-paced eLearning)
IP Convergence Overview
(Self-paced eLearning)
Voice and Video over IP (VoIP)
Overview
(Self-paced eLearning)
Welcome to IP Networking
(Self-paced eLearning)
Voice and Video over
IP Protocols
and Technologies
Instructor led (2 day)
Overview of IMS
(Self-paced eLearning)
ILT Courses
VoIP and SIP in
1x/1xEV-DO MMD Networks
Instructor led (3 day)
29
expert
become
an
by training with those who already are
1x RF Technicians Workshop
Instructor led (2 day)
Overview of CDMA2000
Networks
(Self-paced eLearning)
CDMA2000 Air Interface
(Self-paced eLearning)
CDMA2000 Packet Data
Networks
(Self-paced eLearning)
Mastering 1x
Networks and Signaling
Instructor led (3 day)
1x Radio Networks
Performance Workshop
Instructor led (3 day)
Technicians Focus
Radio Network Focus
1xEV-DO Technicians
Workshop
Instructor led (2 day)
Mastering 1xEV-DO Networks
& Signaling (Rev 0 & A)
Instructor led (3 day)
Mastering UMB Networks
Instructor led (2 day)
Mastering 1xEV-DO
Radio Networks (Rev B)
Instructor led (1 day)
1xEV-DO RF Mentoring
(Rev 0 & A)
Instructor led (3 day)
Mentoring (4 half-day sessions)
Core Network Focus
Welcome to IP Networking
(Self-paced eLearning)
Mastering 1xEV-DO Networks
& Signaling (Rev A)
Instructor led (2 day)
1xEV-DO Networks (Rev A)
(Self-paced eLearning)
ATM and IP Fundamentals
Instructor led (1 day)
VoIP and SIP in
1x/1xEV-DO MMD Networks
Instructor led (3 day)
Mobile IP in
1x/1xEV-DO Networks
Instructor led (2 day)
Exploring MPLS
Instructor led (2 day)
Overview of MMD (IMS) in
1x/1xEV-DO Networks
(Self-paced eLearning)
Customized
Bootcamps
Available
We will work with you to find the most suitable course flowfor your team.
1x & 1xEV-DO for Operators
30
by training with those who already are
expert
become
an
Overview of CDMA2000
Networks
(Self-paced eLearning)
CDMA2000 Air Interface
(Self-paced eLearning)
CDMA2000 Packet Data
Networks
(Self-paced eLearning)
Mastering 1x Networks
and Signaling
Instructor led (3 day)
Radio Network Focus
Mastering 1xEV-DO Networks
& Signaling (Rev 0 & A)
Instructor led (3 day)
Mastering UMB Networks
Instructor led (2 day)
Mastering 1xEV-DO
Radio Networks (Rev B)
Instructor led (1 day)
Core Network Focus
Welcome to IP Networking
(Self-paced eLearning)
Mastering 1xEV-DO Networks
& Signaling (Rev A)
Instructor led (2 day)
1xEV-DO Networks (Rev A)
(Self-paced eLearning)
ATM and IP Fundamentals
Instructor led (1 day)
VoIP and SIP in
1x/1xEV-DO MMD Networks
Instructor led (3 day)
Mobile IP in
1x/1xEV-DO Networks
Instructor led (2 day)
Exploring MPLS
Instructor led (2 day)
Overview of MMD (IMS) in
1x/1xEV-DO Networks
(Self-paced eLearning)
1x & 1xEV-DO for Vendors
Customized
Bootcamps
Available
We will work with you to find the most suitable course flowfor your team.
31
expert
become
an
by training with those who already are
GSM Performance Workshop
Instructor led (3 day)
AMR Performance Workshop
Instructor led (1 day)
GPRS Mobility
(Self-paced eLearning)
Evolution from GSM to UMTS
(Self-paced eLearning)
Overview of GPRS
(Self-paced eLearning)
Exploring GSM
Instructor led (2 day)
Exploring GPRS and EDGE
Instructor led (2 day)
Core Network Focus Radio Network Focus
GPRS Mobility
(Self-paced eLearning)
GPRS and EDGE
Performance Workshop
Instructor led (3 day)
Seamless Mobility
(Self-paced eLearning)
Seamless Mobility
(Self-paced eLearning)
GSM & GPRS/EDGE for Operators
Customized
Bootcamps
Available
We will work with you to find the most suitable course flowfor your team.
32
by training with those who already are
expert
become
an
GPRS Mobility
(Self-paced eLearning)
Overview of GPRS
(Self-paced eLearning)
Exploring GSM
Instructor led (2 day)
Mastering GPRS and EDGE
Instructor led (3 day)
Core Network Focus
Seamless Mobility
(Self-paced eLearning)
GPRS Mobility
(Self-paced eLearning)
Radio Network Focus
Seamless Mobility
(Self-paced eLearning)
GPRS Packet Data Operations
(Self-paced eLearning)
GPRS Air Interface
(Self-paced eLearning)
GSM & GPRS/EDGE for Vendors
Customized
Bootcamps
Available
We will work with you to find the most suitable course flowfor your team.
33
expert
become
an
by training with those who already are
UMTS (WCDMA) for Operators
Core Network Focus Radio Network Focus
HSUPA (R6)
(Self-paced eLearning)
HSDPA (R5)
(Self-paced eLearning)
Overview of UMTS LTE
(Self-paced eLearning)
Mastering HSPA Networks
& Signaling (R5 & R6)
Instructor led (3 day)
Overview of UMTS
(Self-paced eLearning)
UMTS Signaling
(Self-paced eLearning)
Welcome to IP Networking
(Self-paced eLearning)
Mastering UMTS LTE
Instructor led (2 day)
Exploring HSPA+ (R7)
Instructor led (2 day)
Mastering UMTS LTE
Protocols & Signaling
Instructor led (2 day)
SIP Signaling
Instructor led (2 day)
Mastering UMTS Radio
Networks & Signaling
(R99)
Instructor led (3 day)
IP Convergence Overview
(Self-paced eLearning)
Voice and Video over
IP Protocols and Technologies
Instructor led (3 day)
WCDMA RF Mentoring
(R99 to R5)
Instructor led (3 day)
Mentoring (8 half-day sessions)
Overview of OFDM
(Self-paced eLearning)
UMTS Mobility
(Self-paced eLearning)
Exploring UMTS
(WCDMA)
Instructor led (2 day)
ATM and IP Fundamentals
Instructor led (1 day)
Mastering UMTS Core
Networks (R99 to R7)
Instructor led (3 day)
IMS in UMTS Networks
Instructor led (2 day)
Customized
Bootcamps
Available
We will work with you to find the most suitable course flowfor your team.
34
by training with those who already are
expert
become
an
UMTS (WCDMA) for Vendors
HSDPA (R5)
(Self-paced eLearning)
Overview of UMTS LTE
(Self-paced eLearning)
Core Network Focus Radio Network Focus
SIP Signaling
Instructor led (2 day)
Mastering UMTS LTE
Instructor led (2 day)
Exploring HSPA+ (R7)
Instructor led (2 day)
Mastering UMTS LTE
Protocols & Signaling
Instructor led (2 day)
Overview of UMTS
(Self-paced eLearning)
UMTS Signaling
(Self-paced eLearning)
Mastering UMTS Core
Networks (R99 to R7)
Instructor led (3 day)
HSUPA (R6)
(Self-paced eLearning)
UMTS Mobility
(Self-paced eLearning)
Mastering HSPA Networks
& Signaling (R5 & R6)
Instructor led (3 day)
Overview of OFDM
(Self-paced eLearning)
Mastering UMTS (WCDMA)
Radio Networks
Instructor led (3 day)
Customized
Bootcamps
Available
We will work with you to find the most suitable course flowfor your team.
35
expert
become
an
by training with those who already are
36
by training with those who already are
expert
become
an
OFDM Instructor led Course
E
m
e
r
g
i
n
g
T
r
e
n
d
s
Emerging Trends
Instructor led Courses
OFDM Fundamentals
The Wireless Landscape:
Beyond 3G
4G Technology Overview
Advanced Antenna
Technologies for WiMAX
WiMAX Access Network
Planning and Design
Mastering UMTS LTE
Mastering UMTS LTE Protocols
& Signaling
Self-paced eLearning
Courses
Overview of OFDM
Multiple Antenna Technologies
The harmonious evolution from standards-
based 2G cellular wireless systems, such as GSM
and CDMA2000 (1x), to 3G is being challenged
by a combination of uncertain service demands
and the emergence of a raft of new wireless
technologies. Network operators, service pro-
viders and equipment vendors are faced with
major decisions to position themselves for the
future. True capabilities, current deployment
status and potential commercial impact of the
many emerging technologies and standards are
being debated.
IP-based multimedia services are one of the
most exciting and challenging aspects of next
generation wireless networks. A signifcant
evolution has been underway to enable these
multimedia services and ultimately migrate the
Internet to the wireless world.
About the Curriculum
Award Solutions Emerging Trends curriculum
focuses on technologies on the horizon. In this
curriculum, we answer questions like what new
technologies will emerge as candidates for next
generation wireless networks, what are the
candidates for 4G cellular wireless systems,
does WiMAX compete or complement 3G net-
works? The focus is on enabling technologies
for wireless multimedia and the new wireless
multimedia services that are expected to play
a key role in the future wireless environment.
In addition, recent standardization, research
and industry activities are addressed.
37
38
Emerging Trends
Instructor Led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
E
m
e
r
g
i
n
g
T
r
e
n
d
s
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
OFDM Fundamentals
Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) is the transmission technique for all emerging wireless
technologies such as WiMAX and LTE, because it facilitates very high data rates over a wireless medium. This is
very exciting for wireless operators eager to deploy multimedia rich Internet content with seamless access anywhere,
anytime. This course introduces the fundamental concepts of OFDM and OFDMA systems. Discussion topics
include orthogonality, types of subcarriers, the challenges of radio propagation and OFDM-based solutions.
OFDMA basics are described, which include scalability, frame structure and resource allocation strategies. This
course steps through the key OFDM operations in an end-to-end transmission. This course also discusses key
multiple antenna concepts and techniques that help achieve higher spectral efficiency in OFDM systems.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Walk through the evolution of radio technologies
x Describe the concept of OFDM
x Define various terms used in OFDM-based systems
x Outline the challenges of radio propagation and how OFDM
overcomes these challenges
x Explain OFDMA concepts
x Step through various operations of OFDM-based systems
x List multiple antenna techniques used in OFDM systems
x Detail key multiple antenna techniques
Intended Audience
This course is designed for those seeking an understanding of
OFDM concepts. This includes those in product management,
design, development, test, system engineering of wireless
networks. This is also beneficial to the advanced technology
engineers of wireless service providers.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Solid background in a 3G wireless technology
Course Length
1 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Motivation and Overview
1.1. Evolution of radio technologies
1.2. Concepts of FDMA, TDMA and
CDMA
1.3. OFDM technology landscape
2. OFDM Fundamentals
2.1. What is OFDM?
2.2. What is orthogonality?
2.3. Time and frequency domain views
2.4. Subcarrier types
2.5. Inter Symbol Interference (ISI)
2.6. Guard Time/Cyclic Prefix
2.7. IFFT and FFT
2.8. OFDM transmitter processing
2.9. OFDM receiver processing
2.10. OFDM system design example
3. OFDMA Basics
3.1. What is OFDMA?
3.2. Scalable OFDMA
3.3. Frame structure
3.4. OFDMA resources (frequency, time)
3.5. Resource allocation strategies
3.6. Signaling of resource allocation
4. OFDM System Operations
4.1. OFDM device operations overview
4.2. System acquisition stage
4.3. Downlink traffic operations
4.4. Uplink traffic operations
4.5. Handover techniques
4.6. Power control
5. Multiple Antenna Techniques
5.1. Motivation
5.2. Transmit & receive diversity
5.3. Beamforming
5.4. MIMO-Spatial multiplexing
5.5. SDMA
39
Emerging Trends
Instructor Led
E
m
e
r
g
i
n
g
T
r
e
n
d
s
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
E
m
e
r
g
i
n
g
T
r
e
n
d
s
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
The Wireless Landscape: Beyond 3G
A thorough understanding of the fundamental changes introduced by 4G technologies, as well as the resulting
opportunities and challenges, is a must for wireless professionals. Mobile wireless networks are evolving at a rapid
pace to offer faster and more efficient Internet connectivity and advanced multimedia communications. Data rates
over 1 Mbps are quite feasible in various 3G wireless networks such as 1xEV-DO and UMTS (HSDPA). The next
wave of wireless technologies will provide much higher data rates using a new OFDM radio interface, multiple
antenna techniques and an IP-based distributed network architecture. This course provides a conceptual
understanding of 4G technologies and a comparative overview of the next generation of wireless technologies. It
focuses on the three major wireless radio technologies available for the network evolution roadmap: LTE, WiMAX
and UMB. This course also provides a comparative analysis of these three technologies. This comparison is based
on a number of factors, including data rates, architecture, services, interworking with other technologies and
mobility. By the conclusion of the course, the student will have a good understanding of the capabilities and
differentiators of the competing technologies.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Describe the needs and motivation for 4G
x Describe the landscape of 4G wireless networks
x Step through the evolutionary path from existing 2G/3G
wireless networks to next generation wireless networks
x Explain the network architecture of HSPA+, LTE, UMB and
WiMAX to support mobile wireless Internet
x Identify the following aspects of HSPA+, LTE, UMB and
WiMAX networks:
Architecture, capabilities and capacity
High speed data support
Deployment scenarios and interworking with existing
wireless networks
Use of multiple antenna techniques for higher efficiency
x Compare the features and capabilities of HSPA+, LTE,
UMB and WiMAX
x Discuss the activities, schedule & impacts related to recent
events in the wireless industry
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those interested in a comparison of the
key wireless data technologies. It is suited for sales and
marketing personnel, product managers and managers in
engineering organizations.
Suggested Prerequisites
x None
Course Length
1 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. 3.5G & 4G Landscape
1.1. Current state of 3G networks
1.2. Drivers for next generation 4G networks
1.3. Key differences between 3G and 4G
2. HSPA+
2.1. Key characteristics & capabilities
2.2. Network architecture
2.3. Benefits and challenges
2.4. Interworking with 2G/3G
3. 4G Characteristics
3.1. Air interface: OFDM and OFDMA
3.2. Multiple antenna systems
3.3. Backhaul networks: IP and MPLS
3.4. Distributed multimedia network
3.5. Impact on wireless network operations
4. UMTS Long Term Evolution (LTE)
4.1. LTE characteristics & capabilities
4.2. LTE network architecture
4.3. Scenarios for packet session
4.4. Benefits and challenges
4.5. Interworking with 2G/2.5G networks
4.6. Interworking with 3G networks
4.7. Interworking with non-3GPP networks
5. Mobile WiMAX (802.16e)
5.1. WiMAX characteristics & capabilities
5.2. Role of 802.16 and WiMAX forum
5.3. WiMAX network architecture
5.4. WiMAX network profiles
5.5. Basic mobility profile
5.6. Certification
5.7. Benefits and challenges
5.8. Interworking with other technologies
6. Ultra Mobile Broadband (UMB) Networks
6.1. UMB characteristics & capabilities
6.2. Evolution from 1xEV-DO
6.3. UMB network architecture
6.4. UMB air interface basics
6.5. Packet session scenario
6.6. Benefits and challenges
7. 4G Technologies Comparison
7.1. Comparison of wireless data networks
and their features and services
7.2. Deployment timeline
7.3. Deployment by region
8. Market Update
8.1. Discuss recent wireless industry news
9. Putting it all Together
9.1. An exercise to summarize the key points
40
Emerging Trends
Instructor Led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
E
m
e
r
g
i
n
g
T
r
e
n
d
s
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
4G Technology Overview
The 4
th
generation (4G) of wireless technologies is largely based on OFDM and MIMO. OFDM- and MIMO-based
broadband wireless systems promise much higher data rates (over 100 Mbps) to users while reducing the cost per bit
for wireless service providers. This is very exciting to wireless operators who are eager to deploy multimedia
Internet content with seamless access anywhere, anytime. This course provides an overview of the key 4G
contenders WiMAX, UMB (1xEV-DO Rev C) and UMTS LTE, and compares and contrasts features. It starts with
an explanation of the motivating factors for 4G wireless systems, as well as providing a simplified network
architecture of 4G, a common theme across all 4G contenders. This course then quickly moves on to OFDM and
MIMO, which are the foundation technologies for all broadband wireless systems. Once this foundation has been
laid, the details of each 4G wireless system (WiMAX, UMB, and UMTS LTE) are provided, including the frame
structure, OFDM operations at the physical layer and resource management and scheduling considerations at the
MAC layer.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Outline the limitations of current 3G wireless networks and
list the motivating factors of 4G
x Describe the use of OFDM and multiple antenna techniques
in 4G technologies and compare OFDM operations with
CDMA
x Explain the network architecture of UMB, UMTS LTE, and
Mobile WiMAX to support mobile wireless Internet
x Identify the following aspects of UMB, UMTS LTE, and
Mobile WiMAX networks:
Architecture, capabilities and capacity
Radio Access Network and air interface details
High speed data support
Services and Quality of Service (QoS)
x Compare and contrast the features of air interface of UMTS-
LTE, UMB, and Mobile WiMAX
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those interested in a comparison of the
key 4G wireless data technologies. It is suited for product
planning and design engineers, product managers, and technology
evaluators.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Exploring UMTS (WCDMA) (Instructor led)
Course Length
2 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Introduction
1.1. 4G technology and market drivers
1.2. Limitations of 3G networks
1.3. High data rate requirements
1.4. Status of 4G
1.5. Underlying technology OFDM and
Simplified Core Network
2. 4G Network Architecture
2.1. IP based network components
2.2. Flat network structure
3. OFDMA and Multiple Antenna Essentials
3.1. OFDM signal definition
3.2. Multipath and cyclic prefix
3.3. Subcarriers and subchannels
3.4. Concepts of OFDMA
3.5. OFDMA vs. CDMA
3.6. Multiple Antenna techniques
4. Mobile WiMAX
4.1. Role of 802.16 and WiMAX Forum
4.2. WiMAX network architecture
4.3. Use of OFDMA in Mobile WiMAX
4.4. Call setup operations in TDD
5. UMB (1xEV-DO Rev C) Networks
5.1. Evolving network architecture
5.2. Key concepts
5.3. Physical layer operations
5.4. Interworking with 1x/1xEV-DO
6. UMTS LTE E-UTRA and E-UTRAN
6.1. System Architecture Evolution (SAE),
interfaces and protocols
6.2. Enhanced UTRA New air interface
6.3. Physical layer operations
6.4. Interworking with UMTS and GSM
7. Comparison of 4G Technologies
7.1. Comparison of wireless data networks
7.2. Advantages and disadvantages
41
Emerging Trends
Instructor Led
E
m
e
r
g
i
n
g
T
r
e
n
d
s
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
E
m
e
r
g
i
n
g
T
r
e
n
d
s
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Advanced Antenna Technologies for WiMAX
Two key technologies central to the superior air interface of emerging 4G technologies are Orthogonal Frequency
Division Multiple Access (OFDMA) and advanced multiple antenna techniques. Multiple antenna techniques can
significantly improve reliability and spectral efficiency. This course provides an in-depth view of the multiple
antenna techniques defined in IEEE 802.16e-2005 and emphasized by the WiMAX Forum. Antenna basics are
reviewed along with typical antenna configurations in 3G cellular deployments. Major antenna techniques discussed
at length include transmit diversity techniques such as Space-Time Coding (STC - also called STBC and STTD),
beamforming techniques, Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) spatial multiplexing techniques, and
Space/Spatial Division Multiple Access (SDMA). Both downlink and uplink techniques are described. The
auxiliary mechanisms (e.g., feedback methods and configuration methods) in support of the antenna techniques are
also explained. In summary, this course provides a comprehensive treatment of advanced antenna technologies
available in Mobile WiMAX/802.16e-2005 systems.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x List multiple antenna techniques available in WiMAX
x Describe how transmit diversity techniques such as STBC,
FHDC, antenna grouping, and antenna selection are
supported in WiMAX
x Explain how beamforming is implemented in WiMAX
x Describe MIMO spatial multiplexing techniques
x Discuss the implementation of SDMA
x Illustrate configuration and feedback mechanisms that
support various antenna techniques
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking an in-depth knowledge
of how various multiple antenna techniques are implemented in
WiMAX. The target audience includes personnel involved in
design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering, network
engineering, and verification.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Exploring WiMAX (Instructor led)
x Mobile WiMAX Access Network Signaling (Instructor led)
x Multiple Antenna Technologies (eLearning)
Complementary Courses
x OFDM Fundamentals (Instructor led)
Course Length
1 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Antenna Fundamentals and Overview of
WiMAX Air Interface
1.1. Fundamentals of antennas
1.2. Typical 3G antenna configurations
1.3. Air interface review (protocol stack,
radio frame, transceiver)
1.4. Summary of multiple antenna
techniques with advantages and
challenges
1.5. WiMAX/802.16 terminology for
antenna techniques (e.g., Matrix A,
Matrix B, STC, and Collaborative SM)
1.6. Overview of support mechanisms (e.g.,
configuration and feedback)
1.7. WiMAX networks
1.8. WiMAX network architecture and
interfaces
1.9. 802.16 technical features
1.10. System profiles
2. Transmit Diversity Techniques Basic Concept
2.1. Review of basic diversity techniques
(space, time, frequency)
2.2. STBC/STTD, FHDC, and antenna
grouping/selection
2.3. 2- and 4-antenna configurations
2.4. Configuration via signaling messages
and dynamic feedback
3. Beamforming Techniques
3.1. Concept of beamforming
3.2. Transmit and receive beamforming
3.3. Beamforming in downlink and uplink
3.4. SDMA in downlink and uplink
3.5. Configuration and feedback
4. MIMO- Spatial Multiplexing
4.1. Basics of spatial multiplexing
4.2. Open-loop and closed-loop MIMO
(downlink)
4.3. Collaborative spatial multiplexing
(uplink)
4.4. MIMO + beamforming
4.5. Configuration and feedback
5. Integration Various Antenna Techniques
5.1. Combining of various antenna
techniques
5.2. Interaction of antenna techniques with
HARQ
5.3. Summary of configuration and feedback
methods
42
Emerging Trends
Instructor Led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
E
m
e
r
g
i
n
g
T
r
e
n
d
s
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
WiMAX Access Network Planning and Design
Mobile WiMAX system supports broadband wireless access in a mobile cellular environment and is considered the next
generation (beyond 3G) wireless system offering the data rates in range of 100 Mbps. Both the traditional wireless service
providers as well as non-cellular service operators see great potential in offering broadband wireless access experience to
subscriber in a cost-effective manner. Unlike the 3G systems that are based on CDMA air interface, the mobile WiMAX
system is based on OFDM based radio air interface. Mobile WiMAX is going to be the first OFDM based mobile cellular
system and thus deploying such system is going to provide us unique and challenging opportunity. This course covers the
radio network planning and design aspects of a mobile WiMAX network. It describes the process of mapping the service
and market requirements to RF system parameters and walks through the link budget calculations. This course discuss the
cell planning aspects, the use of existing infrastructure, overlay configurations, back haul capacity planning as well as
growth considerations. This course provides practical examples and intertwines the exercises at every stage of the system
design process.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Step through the process of wireless network design
x List the source of interference and ways to overcome in a
typical radio networks
x Work out the link budget for WiMAX system
x Step through the process of mapping the network
requirements to corresponding system parameters
x Describe the impact of operating frequency spectrum and
bandwidth
x Discuss various frequency reuse patterns of WiMAX
x Design the radio network based on capacity, coverage and
quality requirements
x Explore site selection and acceptance
x Calculate the cell site and back haul needs and plan for the
future growth
Intended Audience
This course is intended for WiMAX system designers, RF
systems engineering, network engineering, deployment and
operations personnel.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Exploring WiMAX (Instructor led)
Course Length
3 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Introduction to WiMAX System Design
1.1. Process of wireless network design and
deployment
1.2. WiMAX network requirements
1.3. RF planning checklist
1.4. Network planning checklist
2. Antenna Considerations
2.1. Diversity techniques of WiMAX
2.2. Space Time Coding (STC) MIMO-A
2.3. Spatial Multiplexing MIMO-B
2.4. Beam forming antenna considerations
3. Link Budget and MAPL for Mobile WiMAX
3.1. System parameter considerations
3.2. Gains and losses
3.3. Maximum allowable path loss for UL
and DL
4. WiMAX System Planning Considerations
4.1. Bandwidth options
4.2. Frequency reuse patterns
4.3. Sub-carrier and sub-channel mapping
4.4. PUSC, FUSC, and AMC zones
4.5. Preamble and Perm base planning
5. RF Design
5.1. Planned area and geographic
5.2. Market, radio and service requirements
5.3. RF design process and options
5.4. Propagation models LOS and NLOS
5.5. Site configurations
5.6. Search rings
6. Cell Planning Considerations
6.1. Site selection criteria
6.2. Designing for coverage and capacity
6.3. Designing for traffic and QoS
6.4. Configuration parameter selection
7. Site Shakedown and Acceptance
7.1. Drive testing
7.2. Site shakedowns
7.3. Cluster testing
7.4. Site acceptance
8. WiMAX Network Planning
8.1. Cell site capacity planning
8.2. Back haul capacity planning
8.3. Air interface capacity
8.4. Routing architectures
8.5. Interworking with non-WiMAX systems
43
Emerging Trends
Instructor Led
E
m
e
r
g
i
n
g
T
r
e
n
d
s
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
E
m
e
r
g
i
n
g
T
r
e
n
d
s
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Mastering UMTS LTE
UMTS LTE (Long Term Evolution) is an evolution of the UMTS radio interface based on OFDM and MIMO
technologies. UMTS LTE provides much higher data rates (over 100 Mbps) to users while reducing cost-per-bit for
UMTS service providers. OFDM facilitates higher data rates over a wireless medium. This is very exciting to
wireless operators who are eager to deploy multimedia rich Internet content over a wireless medium with seamless
access anywhere, anytime. This two-day course describes the simplified architecture of UMTS LTE and moves on
to OFDM and MIMO, which are the foundation technologies for several different 4G systems. The course also
covers the downlink and uplink frame structure, OFDM operations at the physical layer, and resource management
and scheduling considerations at the MAC layer. In addition, the deployment and interworking issues with GSM and
UMTS networks are explored. It also describes the competitive landscape by comparing features and services
provided by other 4G systems such as WiMAX and the 3GPP2 evolution of 1xEV-DO.
Note: This course is based on the draft version of the 3GPP specifications.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Highlight the limitations of current 3G wireless networks and
list the motivating factors for 4G
x Describe the use of OFDM and multiple antenna techniques
in 4G technologies and compare OFDM operations with
CDMA
x Explain the network architecture of UMTS LTE to support
mobile wireless Internet
x Identify the following aspects of UMTS LTE networks:
Architecture, capabilities and capacity
Radio Access Network and air interface details
High speed data support
Services and Quality of Service
x Compare and contrast the features of the UMTS LTE air
interface with UMB (1xEV-DO Rev C) and Mobile WiMAX
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those interested in an in-depth
understanding of UMTS LTE. It is suited for those in product
planning, design and engineering.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Mastering HSPA Networks & Signaling (R5 & R6)
(Instructor led)
Course Length
2 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Introduction
1.1. Limitations of 3G networks
1.2. 4G technology and market drivers
1.3. High data rate requirements
1.4. Drivers for UMTS LTE
1.5. Underlying technology OFDM and
Simplified Core Network
2. UMTS LTE Networks
2.1. System Architecture Evolution (SAE)
2.2. Interfaces and protocols
2.3. Evolution path from current UMTS
networks
3. OFDMA and Multiple Antenna Essentials
3.1. OFDM signal definition
3.2. Multi-path and cyclic prefix
3.3. Subcarriers and subchannels
3.4. Concepts of OFDMA
3.5. OFDMA vs. CDMA
3.6. Multiple antenna techniques
4. Enhanced UMTS Air Interface (E-UTRA)
4.1. Key concepts
4.2. Downlink frame structure
4.3. Uplink frame structure
4.4. Physical layer operations
4.5. Support for MIMO
5. Signaling and Traffic Operations
5.1. System acquisition and idle mode
operations
5.2. Resource management strategies
5.3. Traffic operations in DL & UL
5.4. Power control
5.5. Handover and serving sector selection
6. Deployment and Interworking
6.1. Interworking with UMTS and GSM
6.2. Interworking with other 4G systems
7. 4G Technologies Comparison
7.1. Compare and contrast with WiMAX and
UMB (1xEV-DO Rev C)
44
Emerging Trends
Instructor Led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
E
m
e
r
g
i
n
g
T
r
e
n
d
s
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Mastering UMTS LTE Protocols & Signaling
In the wireless landscape, the path from 3G to 4G is being defined. On the UMTS/3GPP side, the proposal for the
next generation wireless network is known as the Long Term Evolution (LTE). LTE promises dramatic
improvements in throughput and latency, thus opening a new era in the Quality of Experience (QoE) perceived by
wireless subscribers. These enhancements are based on three fundamental pillars: a new air interface
(OFDM+MIMO), simplified network architecture (no RNCs) and an efficient signaling mechanism. Signaling in
LTE is instrumental in reducing latency as well as provisioning, modifying, and reconfiguring the Quality of Service
(QoS). This course takes a detailed look at the layer 2 and 3 signaling procedures as defined in the 3GPP
specifications. The main focus is on UE-to-E-UTRAN signaling, with an overview of the end-to-end scenario
involving the IMS component of the core network.
Note: This course is based on the draft version of the 3GPP specifications.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Sketch the network architecture, related protocols,
procedures and functions of the LTE network and its
elements
x Identify the air interface, S2 and X2 messages, procedures
and parameters for troubleshooting and optimization
x Explain the detailed setup and monitoring of the RRC
connection between the UE and the E-UTRAN
x Describe the role of the MAC, RLC and PDCP protocols and
the HARQ parameters
x Describe various handover scenarios and the associated
signaling procedures
x Describe inter-system handover mechanisms, in particular
the 4G to 3G/2G scenario
x Walk through a VoIP/data call setup
Intended Audience
This course is primarily intended for a technical audience in
design, test, systems engineering or product support with a
signaling background in UMTS or other systems who wants to
understand LTE signaling details
Suggested Prerequisites
x Overview of UMTS LTE (eLearning)
x Mastering UMTS LTE (Instructor led)
Course Length
2 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Overview of LTE
1.1. LTE requirements
1.2. Architecture and node functions
1.3. LTE bearers & QoS Model
2. LTE Signaling Model
2.1. Radio protocol architecture
2.2. LTE channels overview
2.3. LTE air interface protocol stack
2.4. S1 interface & protocols
2.5. X2 interface & protocols
3. Scenario: RRC setup
3.1. Overview of PHY layer
3.2. Power-up acquisition
3.3. System Information Broadcasting
3.4. Access signaling
3.5. RRC signaling
3.6. PHY layer parameters
4. Scenario: IP address allocation
4.1. Attach signaling
4.2. MME Selection
4.3. Authentication procedure
4.4. Security procedure
4.5. P-GW selection
4.6. Default bearer configuration
5. Scenario: Service setup
5.1. Service request
5.2. QoS in LTE
5.3. Admission Control
5.4. Radio Bearer setup
6. Scenario: Downlink Traffic Handling
6.1. Channel Quality Report Signaling
6.2. DL Scheduling
6.3. DL Control Signaling
6.4. DL Shared channel
6.5. HARQ
7. Scenario: Uplink Traffic Handling
7.1. Schedule request
7.2. UL Scheduler
7.3. Control Signaling
7.4. UL Shared channel
7.5. HARQ
8. Mobility Scenarios
8.1. Cell selection/reselection/TA Update
8.2. Idle & Active states
8.3. Inter LTE handover
8.4. LTE/HSPA/EDGE handovers
8.5. Non-3GPP handovers
45
Emerging Trends
Self-paced eLearning
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
E
m
e
r
g
i
n
g
T
r
e
n
d
s
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Overview of OFDM
Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) is a transmission technique used to achieve very high data
rates. OFDM is the technology of choice for all major wireless systems including Wireless LAN 802.11, WiMAX
802.16, Digital audio/video broadcast systems such as Digital Video Broadcast Handheld (DVB-H), Media FLO,
and the air interface evolution of 3G Wireless systems based on 3GPP and 3GPP2. OFDM facilitates higher data
rates over a wireless medium which is very exciting to wireless operators who are eager to deploy multimedia rich
Internet content over a wireless medium with seamless access anywhere, anytime. This course describes the key
OFDM concepts and terminology. It explains the challenges of radio propagation and describes how OFDM
overcomes these challenges to offer high data rates in a spectrally efficient manner. This course steps through the
key OFDM operations in an end-to-end transmission.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Walk through the evolution of radio technologies
x Describe the evolution and concept of OFDM
x List the key attributes of OFDM and understand the
frequency domain orthogonality
x Define various terms used in OFDM-based systems
x Describe the challenges of radio propagation and how OFDM
overcome these challenges
x Describe the key operation of cyclic prefix, FFT and IFFT
x Step through various operations of OFDM-based systems
Intended Audience
This course is designed for those seeking an understanding of
OFDM concepts. This includes those in product management,
design, development, test, system engineering of wireless
networks. This is also beneficial to the advanced technology
engineers of wireless service providers.
Suggested Prerequisites
x None
Average Course Length
3 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
Introduction
x Evolution of radio technologies
x Concepts of FDMA, TDMA, CDMA
x Need for OFDM for high data rates
Principles of OFDM
x Key attributes of OFDM
x Frequency domain orthogonality
x Time and frequency domain views
OFDM Terminology
x Carrier and subcarrier
x Modulation and OFDM symbol
x Subcarrier spacing
x Guard period and cyclic prefix
Radio Propagation
x Multipath and doppler shift
x Inter Symbol Interference (ISI)
x Guard Time
x Inter Carrier Interference (ICI)
x Cyclic prefix and pilots
OFDM Operations
x Encoding and modulation
x Serial-to-parallel conversation
x Frequency to time domain conversion
x Addition of cyclic prefix
x RF Modulation
x Fast Fourier Transform (FFT)
x Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT)
x Transmitting and receiving of an OFDM
system
Summary
Put It All Together
x Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course
46
Emerging Trends
Self-paced eLearning
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
E
m
e
r
g
i
n
g
T
r
e
n
d
s
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Multiple Antenna Technologies
Advanced multiple antenna technologies enable emerging 4G cellular technologies to achieve superior data rates
over the air interface (e.g., in excess of 100 Mbps). While 4G networks utilize an efficient multiple access technique
called OFDMA (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access), OFDMA on its own cannot deliver the expected
superior throughput in 4G systems. Multiple antenna techniques play a critical role in increasing spectral efficiency.
This course provides fundamental knowledge of numerous multiple antenna techniques that will be an integral part
of emerging radio access standards. The antenna basics are explained, along with typical antenna configurations in
commercial cellular deployments. Major antenna techniques covered in the course include transmit/receiver
diversity techniques such as space-time coding (STC), beamforming techniques such as an adaptive beamforming
system, multiple input multiple output (MIMO) spatial multiplexing techniques, and space/spatial division multiple
access (SDMA). In summary, this course provides a strong foundation for advanced antenna technologies.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Outline key benefits and challenges of multiple antenna
techniques
x Provide examples of various types of multiple antenna
techniques
x Explain transmit and receive diversity techniques such as
Space Time Coding and antenna grouping
x Contrast a switched-beam system with an adaptive
beamforming technique
x Describe MIMO- Spatial Multiplexing techniques
x Discuss the implementation of SDMA
x Give examples of the multiple antenna techniques defined in
emerging 4G cellular networks
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a fundamental
understanding of how various multiple antenna techniques work.
This includes those in a design, test, systems engineering, sales
engineering, network engineering, or verification role.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Overview of 3G Wireless Networks (eLearning)
Complementary Courses
x Overview of OFDM (eLearning)
Average Course Length
3 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
Introduction to Antenna Techniques
x Antenna basics: transmit and receive
operation, antenna parameters, and
antenna gain characteristics
x Motivation for advanced antenna
techniques
x Example of antenna configurations: omni
and sectorized systems, 1 transmit and 1
receive antenna, 1 transmit and 2 receive
antennas with space and polarization
diversity
x Summary of multiple antenna techniques,
including advantages and challenges
Transmit and Receive Diversity Techniques
x Basic techniques (space, time, and
frequency)
x Advanced transmit diversity techniques
including STC, frequency/space, and
antenna grouping/selection
x Receive diversity
Beamforming Techniques
x Construction of a beam
x Transmit and receive beamforming
x Switched-beam system
x Adaptive beamforming system
x Benefits and challenges of beamforming
MIMO- Spatial Multiplexing
x Basics of spatial multiplexing
x Horizontal and vertical encoding, single-
code word and multi-code word
x MIMO Transmitter and Receiver
Examples
x Closed-loop MIMO (MIMO + precoding)
x Collaborative spatial multiplexing
x Benefits and challenges of MIMO-SM
Summary
Put It All Together
x Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the course objectives
by training with those who already are
expert
become
an
W
i
M
A
X
WiMAX
Instructor led Courses
WiMAX Essentials
Exploring WiMAX
Advanced Antenna
Technologies for WiMAX
Mobile WiMAX Access Network
Signaling
WiMAX Access Network
Planning and Design
Mobile WiMAX Core Networks
Self-paced eLearning
Courses
Overview of OFDM
Overview of WiMAX
Multiple Antenna Technologies
Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave
Access (WiMAX) is a standards-based wireless
broadband solution that has emerged as one of
the major candidates for next generation wire-
less networks. While analyst predictions on the
growth of the WiMAX market vary, this tech-
nology is expected to capture a sizable share
of the existing wireless broadband market.
For example, service providers are evaluat-
ing potential WiMAX services and capabilities,
and the lure of WiMAX is driving many lead-
ing equipment manufacturers and component
suppliers to formulate strategic partnerships.
Enabling advanced multimedia applications
with its high-data rates, and attracting atten-
tion with its low-cost infrastructure, WiMAX
continues to gain tremendous momentum in
the marketplace.
WiMAX has numerous applications that can
be tailored to a variety of market segments.
But how will WiMAX survive in the existing
marketplace? Do WiMAX networks compete or
complement 3G networks? Is WiMAX just hype
or here to stay? Finally, will WiMAX live up to
its high data rates and capacity projections?
About the Curriculum
Award Solutions WiMAX curriculum includes a
suite of cutting-edge courses designed to sepa-
rate the facts from the hype. From foundation-
building overview courses that provide an end-
to-end view of the network architecture, to a
detailed in-depth analysis of advanced signal-
ing topics, Awards WiMAX curriculum includes
training solutions for all audiences.
Exploring WiMAX Instructor led Course
47
48
WiMAX
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
W
i
M
A
X
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
WiMAX Essentials
WiMAX has emerged as one of the major candidates for next generation wireless networks. WiMAX defines
solutions for both fixed and mobile Broadband Wireless Access (BWA) networks. This course provides a snapshot
of all aspects of Mobile WiMAX networks. It begins with a discussion of the current state of wireless networks and
defines where WiMAX fits in. The WiMAX network architecture and its components are introduced to provide an
end-to-end view of the WiMAX network. Both peak and practical data rates possible in the 802.16e-based air
interface are covered. This course provides an overview of important WiMAX operations such as connection setup,
bandwidth allocation schemes, and mobility. In addition, deployment issues are explored, including spectrum
allocation for WiMAX worldwide, upgrades from existing proprietary systems and challenges for deploying
WiMAX systems. After completing this course, the student will understand the evolutionary path for both 3GPP-
and 3GPP2-based networks to make effective decisions regarding the selection and implementation of new
technologies. The course also discusses key players in standardization, design, and development of WiMAX
systems.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Describe the current state of wireless networks and drivers
for next generation wireless networks
x Sketch the WiMAX network architecture, protocols and
interfaces
x Define key features of the 802.16e-based air interface for
WiMAX networks
x Compare WiMAX and its underlying technology with the
current 3G cellular networks and WiFi networks
x Sketch the roadmap for competing technologies such as
WiFi, 3GPP and 3GPP2
x Identify the challenges ahead for WiMAX deployment
related to spectrum, availability of products, etc.
Intended Audience
This course is designed for those in sales, marketing, product line
management and executives who need to understand WiMAX and
its place in the wireless competitive landscape.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Overview of WiMAX (eLearning)
Course Length
1 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Motivation and Overview
1.1. Current state of wireless networks
1.2. Drivers for WiMAX networks
1.3. 3G and 4G wireless alternatives
1.4. Frequency spectrum options
2. WiMAX Networks
2.1. Fixed and mobile WiMAX
2.2. WiMAX network architecture
2.3. ASN profiles
2.4. Mobility profiles
2.5. Bandwidth configuration
2.6. TDD and DL/UL split
2.7. Coverage comparison
3. Features & Services in WiMAX Networks
3.1. Peak and average data rates
3.2. Spectrum efficiency
3.3. Cell edge data rates
3.4. QoS classes
3.5. Security
3.6. Data and VoIP services
3.7. Limitations and challenges
4. WiMAX Technical Overview
4.1. Concepts of OFDM
4.2. Scalable OFDMA
4.3. Mandatory and optional features
4.4. Multiple antenna technologies such as
MIMO-A, MIMO-B, beamforming
5. WiMAX Operations
5.1. Connection setup
5.2. Bandwidth allocation schemes
5.3. Support for mobility
5.4. End-to-end flow
5.5. Interactions with non-WiMAX networks
6. WiMAX Deployment
6.1. Spectrum challenges
6.2. Major deployment challenges
6.3. Upgrades from legacy systems
6.4. Deployment timeline
7. WiMAX Comparative Analysis
7.1. WiFi, 3GPP and 3GPP2 evolution
49
WiMAX
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
W
i
M
A
X
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Exploring WiMAX
WiMAX has emerged as one of the major candidates for next generation wireless networks. WiMAX defines
solutions for both fixed and mobile Broadband Wireless Access (BWA) networks. This course provides an in-depth
overview of 802.16 technical features, mobile WiMAX network architecture and a comparison to competing
technologies in order to understand the competition for WiMAX. After discussing WiMAX networks, this course
covers the concepts of OFDM, the WiMAX airlink technology. It focuses on the 802.16e air interface, emphasizing
physical and MAC layers. Important aspects of 802.16e such as subchannel usage, frequency reuse, the TDD frame
structure, scalable OFDMA, connection setup and bandwidth management are discussed. Also provided is an
overview of the key MAC layer messages such as DCD, UCD, and DL/UL MAP and discusses the link budget
parameters for the WiMAX airlink. A discussion of radio handovers is included. The use of advanced features
including Adaptive Modulation and Coding (AMC), Space Time Coding (STC) and Multiple Input Multiple Output
(MIMO) to achieve better throughput and coverage are explored.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Sketch the WiMAX network architecture, protocols and
interfaces
x Describe the concept of OFDM and its key features
x Demonstrate how scalable OFDMA is used in WiMAX to
achieve high data rates
x Enumerate subchannel usage and frequency reuse
x Step through WiMAX operations such as connection setup
and bandwidth allocation procedures
x Describe handover procedures used for mobile WiMAX
x Explain advanced 802.16e features such as AMC, STC and
MIMO
Intended Audience
This course is designed for those involved in specification, design
and development of WiMAX-based systems. It is suitable for
R&D engineers, product managers involved in developing
WiMAX systems and supporting infrastructure.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Overview of WiMAX (eLearning)
Course Length
2 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Introduction
1.1. Trends for next generation networks
1.2. Major deployment challenges
1.3. Competing technologies
2. WiMAX Networks
2.1. WiMAX network architecture &
interfaces
2.2. 802.16 technical features
2.3. System profiles
3. OFDM Concepts
3.1. Basic concept
3.2. OFDM signal definition
3.3. Multi-path and cyclic prefix
3.4. OFDM vs. spread spectrum
4. WiMAX (802.16e) PHY layer
4.1. Scalable OFDMA
4.2. Subchannels
4.3. Frequency reuse
4.4. Frequency/interference diversity
5. WiMAX MAC Layer Basics
5.1. MAC layer features
5.2. PHY layer frame structure (TDD)
5.3. Key MAC messages (DL-MAP, UL-
MAP, UCD & DCD)
5.4. Initial network access
5.5. Initial ranging and periodic ranging
5.6. Access network connection
6. WiMAX Airlink Management
6.1. WiMAX QoS classes
6.2. Bandwidth allocation (polling,
contention, unsolicited)
6.3. Adaptive Modulation & Coding (AMC)
6.4. Power control
6.5. Link budget
7. Mobile WiMAX Handovers
7.1. Scanning
7.2. Hard handovers
8. Mobile WiMAX Advanced Antennas
8.1. Transmit and receive diversity
8.2. Spatial multiplexing
8.3. Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO)
50
WiMAX
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
W
i
M
A
X
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Advanced Antenna Technologies for WiMAX
Two key technologies central to the superior air interface of emerging 4G technologies are Orthogonal Frequency
Division Multiple Access (OFDMA) and advanced multiple antenna techniques. Multiple antenna techniques can
significantly improve reliability and spectral efficiency. This course provides an in-depth view of the multiple
antenna techniques defined in IEEE 802.16e-2005 and emphasized by the WiMAX Forum. Antenna basics are
reviewed along with typical antenna configurations in 3G cellular deployments. Major antenna techniques discussed
at length include transmit diversity techniques such as Space-Time Coding (STC - also called STBC and STTD),
beamforming techniques, Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) spatial multiplexing techniques, and
Space/Spatial Division Multiple Access (SDMA). Both downlink and uplink techniques are described. The
auxiliary mechanisms (e.g., feedback methods and configuration methods) in support of the antenna techniques are
also explained. In summary, this course provides a comprehensive treatment of advanced antenna technologies
available in Mobile WiMAX/802.16e-2005 systems.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x List multiple antenna techniques available in WiMAX
x Describe how transmit diversity techniques such as STBC,
FHDC, antenna grouping, and antenna selection are
supported in WiMAX
x Explain how beamforming is implemented in WiMAX
x Describe MIMO spatial multiplexing techniques
x Discuss the implementation of SDMA
x Illustrate configuration and feedback mechanisms that
support various antenna techniques
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking an in-depth knowledge
of how various multiple antenna techniques are implemented in
WiMAX. The target audience includes personnel involved in
design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering, network
engineering, and verification.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Exploring WiMAX (Instructor led)
x Mobile WiMAX Access Network Signaling (Instructor led)
x Multiple Antenna Technologies (eLearning)
Complementary Courses
x OFDM Fundamentals (Instructor led)
Course Length
1 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Antenna Fundamentals and Overview of
WiMAX Air Interface
1.1. Fundamentals of antennas
1.2. Typical 3G antenna configurations
1.3. Air interface review (protocol stack,
radio frame, transceiver)
1.4. Summary of multiple antenna
techniques with advantages and
challenges
1.5. WiMAX/802.16 terminology for
antenna techniques (e.g., Matrix A,
Matrix B, STC, and Collaborative SM)
1.6. Overview of support mechanisms (e.g.,
configuration and feedback)
1.7. WiMAX networks
1.8. WiMAX network architecture and
interfaces
1.9. 802.16 technical features
1.10. System profiles
2. Transmit Diversity Techniques Basic Concept
2.1. Review of basic diversity techniques
(space, time, frequency)
2.2. STBC/STTD, FHDC, and antenna
grouping/selection
2.3. 2- and 4-antenna configurations
2.4. Configuration via signaling messages
and dynamic feedback
3. Beamforming Techniques
3.1. Concept of beamforming
3.2. Transmit and receive beamforming
3.3. Beamforming in downlink and uplink
3.4. SDMA in downlink and uplink
3.5. Configuration and feedback
4. MIMO- Spatial Multiplexing
4.1. Basics of spatial multiplexing
4.2. Open-loop and closed-loop MIMO
(downlink)
4.3. Collaborative spatial multiplexing
(uplink)
4.4. MIMO + beamforming
4.5. Configuration and feedback
5. Integration Various Antenna Techniques
5.1. Combining of various antenna
techniques
5.2. Interaction of antenna techniques with
HARQ
5.3. Summary of configuration and feedback
methods
51
WiMAX
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
W
i
M
A
X
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Mobile WiMAX Access Network Signaling
Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) has emerged as one of the major candidates for next
generation wireless networks. WiMAX promotes the IEEE 802.16 family of specifications for fixed and mobile
Broadband Wireless Access (BWA). This course focuses on the details of WiMAX air interface signaling.
Beginning with an overview of the mobile WiMAX architecture, this course covers the interfaces, protocols, and
messaging architectures of mobile WiMAX networks. It also covers the life of a mobile from system acquisition to
establishing a data connection. This course gives a detailed view of the air interface, and also includes handovers
and access network operations. In addition, students will step through several detailed scenarios and operations, as
well as examine the security and quality of service aspects supported within the mobile WiMAX framework. The
use of advanced features such as Adaptive Modulation and Coding (AMC), Advanced Antenna Systems (AAS) and
Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO), used to achieve better throughput and coverage, are explored. By the end
of this course, students will have a comprehensive understanding of the mobile WiMAX access network.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Define the network architecture, related protocols and
messaging architectures of mobile WiMAX networks
x Describe the messages for setting up a data connection in
mobile WiMAX networks
x Describe the detailed messages and parameters used on the
WiMAX air interface such as system acquisition, ranging,
network entry, polling, bandwidth allocation, and power
control
x Define QoS and service flow operations
x Describe sleep mode, power saving classes, idle mode and
paging operations
x Describe airlink management procedures, including Adaptive
Modulation & Coding, feedback reports, ARQ/HARQ, power
control, and link budget calculations
x Step through handover procedures and ASN-anchored
mobility
x Describe some of the important features of WiMAX such as
MIMO and spatial multiplexing
Intended Audience
This course is intended for a technical audience, including those
in product design, test, systems engineering, network engineering,
product support and operations.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Exploring WiMAX (Instructor led)
Course Length
3 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. WiMAX Networks
1.1. WiMAX network architecture,
interfaces and protocols
1.2. ASN profiles
2. WiMAX Signaling Basics
2.1. MAC PDUs
2.2. Network identifiers
2.3. Connection IDs
3. System Acquisition Procedures
3.1. Mobile system acquisition
3.2. CDMA ranging and synchronization
3.3. Network selection
4. Network Entry Procedures
4.1. Registration
4.2. Authentication
4.3. Initial service flows
5. Airlink Security
5.1. Security associations
5.2. Traffic encryption
5.3. Message integrity checks
6. Service Flows and Quality of Service
6.1. Service flow initiation
6.2. Service flows and IP QoS
6.3. Management of QoS classes
7. Bandwidth Management
7.1. Role of scheduler and QoS management
7.2. Bandwidth allocation (unsolicited,
polling, contention)
8. Normal Mode and Sleep Mode Operations
8.1. Modes of operation
8.2. Periodic ranging
8.3. Sleep mode & power saving classes
9. Idle Mode and Paging
9.1. Idle mode entry/exit
9.2. Location updates
9.3. Paging operations
10. WiMAX Airlink Management
10.1. Adaptive modulation and coding
10.2. Feedback channels & CQI reports
10.3. ARQ and HARQ mechanisms
11. Handover
11.1. Hard handovers
11.2. HO optimization
12. Mobile WiMAX Advanced Antennas
12.1. Multiple antenna technologies
12.2. MIMO-A, MIMO-B and beamforming
13. End-to-End Flow
13.1. Sample WiMAX session
52
WiMAX
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
W
i
M
A
X
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
WiMAX Access Network Planning and Design
Mobile WiMAX system supports broadband wireless access in a mobile cellular environment and is considered the next
generation (beyond 3G) wireless system offering the data rates in range of 100 Mbps. Both the traditional wireless service
providers as well as non-cellular service operators see great potential in offering broadband wireless access experience to
subscriber in a cost-effective manner. Unlike the 3G systems that are based on CDMA air interface, the mobile WiMAX
system is based on OFDM based radio air interface. Mobile WiMAX is going to be the first OFDM based mobile cellular
system and thus deploying such system is going to provide us unique and challenging opportunity. This course covers the
radio network planning and design aspects of a mobile WiMAX network. It describes the process of mapping the service
and market requirements to RF system parameters and walks through the link budget calculations. This course discuss the
cell planning aspects, the use of existing infrastructure, overlay configurations, back haul capacity planning as well as
growth considerations. This course provides practical examples and intertwines the exercises at every stage of the system
design process.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Step through the process of wireless network design
x List the source of interference and ways to overcome in a
typical radio networks
x Work out the link budget for WiMAX system
x Step through the process of mapping the network
requirements to corresponding system parameters
x Describe the impact of operating frequency spectrum and
bandwidth
x Discuss various frequency reuse patterns of WiMAX
x Design the radio network based on capacity, coverage and
quality requirements
x Explore site selection and acceptance
x Calculate the cell site and back haul needs and plan for the
future growth
Intended Audience
This course is intended for WiMAX system designers, RF
systems engineering, network engineering, deployment and
operations personnel.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Exploring WiMAX (Instructor led)
Course Length
3 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Introduction to WiMAX System Design
1.1. Process of wireless network design and
deployment
1.2. WiMAX network requirements
1.3. RF planning checklist
1.4. Network planning checklist
2. Antenna Considerations
2.1. Diversity techniques of WiMAX
2.2. Space Time Coding (STC) MIMO-A
2.3. Spatial Multiplexing MIMO-B
2.4. Beam forming antenna considerations
3. Link Budget and MAPL for Mobile WiMAX
3.1. System parameter considerations
3.2. Gains and losses
3.3. Maximum allowable path loss for UL
and DL
4. WiMAX System Planning Considerations
4.1. Bandwidth options
4.2. Frequency reuse patterns
4.3. Sub-carrier and sub-channel mapping
4.4. PUSC, FUSC, and AMC zones
4.5. Preamble and Perm base planning
5. RF Design
5.1. Planned area and geographic
5.2. Market, radio and service requirements
5.3. RF design process and options
5.4. Propagation models LOS and NLOS
5.5. Site configurations
5.6. Search rings
6. Cell Planning Considerations
6.1. Site selection criteria
6.2. Designing for coverage and capacity
6.3. Designing for traffic and QoS
6.4. Configuration parameter selection
7. Site Shakedown and Acceptance
7.1. Drive testing
7.2. Site shakedowns
7.3. Cluster testing
7.4. Site acceptance
8. WiMAX Network Planning
8.1. Cell site capacity planning
8.2. Back haul capacity planning
8.3. Air interface capacity
8.4. Routing architectures
8.5. Interworking with non-WiMAX systems
53
WiMAX
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
W
i
M
A
X
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Mobile WiMAX Core Networks
WiMAX has emerged as one of the major players in next generation wireless networks. WiMAX defines solutions
for both fixed and mobile Broadband Wireless Access (BWA) networks. To support voice, video, and data services,
WiMAX utilizes a distributed unified All-IP network. The course begins with a technology review of WiMAX and
the WiMAX architecture and profiles. The course then delves into details of the network architecture and the
components and functions that make up the core, the Connectivity Services Network (CSN). This is followed by a
comprehensive study of end-to-end session establishment from the CSNs perspective, including authentication and
security, registration, IP address assignment, addition of services and the end-to-end traffic packet path. Building on
this understanding of the core network, the course also covers mobility and roaming scenarios. Finally, there is an
in-depth look at services and accounting considerations.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Define the WiMAX architecture
x Describe components that make up the CSN and their roles
x Explain how authentication and security are achieved in a
WiMAX network
x Describe the different options for IP address allocation
x Differentiate between Simple IP and Mobile IP
x Differentiate between CMIP and PMIP
x Walk through WiMAX application session setup
x Explain how services are added and how QoS requirements
are managed
x Step through WiMAX handovers and the roaming process
x Explain the accounting architecture for the WiMAX network
x Describe deployment challenges and considerations
Intended Audience
This course is designed for those involved in deployment and
engineering of WiMAX systems. It is suitable for core network
engineers and managers involved in deployment and operation of
WiMAX networks.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Overview of WiMAX (eLearning)
x Exploring WiMAX (Instructor led)
Course Length
2 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. WiMAX Overview
1.1. WiMAX variants
1.2. Key WiMAX players
1.3. WiMAX technology overview
1.4. Deployment choices
2. WiMAX Network
2.1. Network architecture and profiles
2.2. Connectivity Services Network (CSN)
2.3. Roles of CSN components
2.3.1. AAA, Mobile IP, IMS
2.4. Topology of core network
3. Security in WiMAX
3.1. Security framework and role of AAA
3.2. RADIUS and DIAMETER protocols
4. WiMAX Data Session Setup
4.1. Authentication and security
4.2. Subscriber profile management
4.3. Registration
4.4. Pre-provisioned service flow establishment
4.5. IP address assignment
4.5.1. Simple IP
4.5.2. Mobile IP
4.5.2.1. CMIP vs. PMIP
4.6. Service flow and QoS management
4.7. End-to-end traffic packet flow
5. WiMAX Mobility and Roaming
5.1. Simple IP handover
5.2. Mobile IP handover
5.3. Idle mode
5.4. Roaming
6. Services and Accounting
6.1. Pre-provisioned services
6.2. QoS support
6.3. Accounting
6.3.1. Architecture
6.3.2. Information flow
6.4. Deployment considerations
7. Role of IMS in WiMAX
7.1. Roles and motivations for IMS
8. IPv4 and IPv6
8.1. Roles and motivations for IPv6
9. End-to-End Data Connection
54
WiMAX
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
W
i
M
A
X
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Overview of OFDM
Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) is a transmission technique used to achieve very high data
rates. OFDM is the technology of choice for all major wireless systems including Wireless LAN 802.11, WiMAX
802.16, Digital audio/video broadcast systems such as Digital Video Broadcast Handheld (DVB-H), Media FLO,
and the air interface evolution of 3G Wireless systems based on 3GPP and 3GPP2. OFDM facilitates higher data
rates over a wireless medium which is very exciting to wireless operators who are eager to deploy multimedia rich
Internet content over a wireless medium with seamless access anywhere, anytime. This course describes the key
OFDM concepts and terminology. It explains the challenges of radio propagation and describes how OFDM
overcomes these challenges to offer high data rates in a spectrally efficient manner. This course steps through the
key OFDM operations in an end-to-end transmission.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Walk through the evolution of radio technologies
x Describe the evolution and concept of OFDM
x List the key attributes of OFDM and understand the
frequency domain orthogonality
x Define various terms used in OFDM-based systems
x Describe the challenges of radio propagation and how OFDM
overcome these challenges
x Describe the key operation of cyclic prefix, FFT and IFFT
x Step through various operations of OFDM-based systems
Intended Audience
This course is designed for those seeking an understanding of
OFDM concepts. This includes those in product management,
design, development, test, system engineering of wireless
networks. This is also beneficial to the advanced technology
engineers of wireless service providers.
Suggested Prerequisites
x None
Average Course Length
3 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
Introduction
x Evolution of radio technologies
x Concepts of FDMA, TDMA, CDMA
x Need for OFDM for high data rates
Principles of OFDM
x Key attributes of OFDM
x Frequency domain orthogonality
x Time and frequency domain views
OFDM Terminology
x Carrier and subcarrier
x Modulation and OFDM symbol
x Subcarrier spacing
x Guard period and cyclic prefix
Radio Propagation
x Multipath and doppler shift
x Inter Symbol Interference (ISI)
x Guard Time
x Inter Carrier Interference (ICI)
x Cyclic prefix and pilots
OFDM Operations
x Encoding and modulation
x Serial-to-parallel conversation
x Frequency to time domain conversion
x Addition of cyclic prefix
x RF Modulation
x Fast Fourier Transform (FFT)
x Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT)
x Transmitting and receiving of an OFDM
system
Summary
Put It All Together
x Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course
55
WiMAX
Self-paced eLearning
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
W
i
M
A
X
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Overview of WiMAX
WiMAX is one of the choices for next generation broadband wireless networks. Its high data rates enable advanced
multimedia applications. Also, it offers a wireless alternative to popular DSL and cable modem access services.
This eLearning course offers a quick and concise overview of WiMAX networks and the 802.16e based air
interface. WiMAX protocols, air interface and mobility aspects are covered to provide an end-to-end view of the
network. The discussion of QoS, security and services enables the student to understand the potential of WiMAX
networks. End-to-end connection setup and bandwidth allocation scenarios provide a glimpse into the operation of
WiMAX networks. By the conclusion of this course, the student will understand what WiMAX offers, its network
architecture, how it works, and potential applications and services.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Describe the state of wireless networks and trends for next
generation wireless networks
x Sketch the WiMAX network architecture and its interfaces
x Describe OFDM concept and how it is used in 802.16e
x Define the key features of the 802.16e air interface for
WiMAX
x Explain how mobility is enabled in WiMAX networks
x Describe potential applications in WiMAX networks
x List steps in establishing WiMAX connection and allocation
of bandwidth
x Explain deployment scenarios of WiMAX networks
Intended Audience
This course is an end-to-end overview of WiMAX networks, so it
is targeted for a broad audience. This includes those in design,
test, sales, marketing, system engineering and deployment groups.
Suggested Prerequisites
x None
Average Course Length
3 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
Setting the stage
x Wireless networks: 3G, WiFi & BWA
x Trends for next generation wireless
networks
x Broadband wireless access networks
x Drivers for WiMAX
WiMAX Networks
x WiMAX network architecture and
interfaces
x Key features of WiMAX
x 802.16e air interface for WiMAX
WiMAX Applications
x Data and VoIP applications
WiMAX (802.16e) air interface
x OFDM/OFDMA and SOFDMA Concepts
x Protocol stack
x Mobility profiles
WiMAX QoS and Security
x QoS Classes
x PKMv2 security
End to End Connection Setup
x Walk through of connection setup
x Walk through of traffic flow
WiMAX Mobility
x Radio mobility
x Network mobility
Deployment Scenarios
x Deployment choices
x Spectrum Issues
Summary
Put It All Together
x Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course
56
WiMAX
Self-paced eLearning
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
W
i
M
A
X
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Multiple Antenna Technologies
Advanced multiple antenna technologies enable emerging 4G cellular technologies to achieve superior data rates
over the air interface (e.g., in excess of 100 Mbps). While 4G networks utilize an efficient multiple access technique
called OFDMA (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access), OFDMA on its own cannot deliver the expected
superior throughput in 4G systems. Multiple antenna techniques play a critical role in increasing spectral efficiency.
This course provides fundamental knowledge of numerous multiple antenna techniques that will be an integral part
of emerging radio access standards. The antenna basics are explained, along with typical antenna configurations in
commercial cellular deployments. Major antenna techniques covered in the course include transmit/receiver
diversity techniques such as space-time coding (STC), beamforming techniques such as an adaptive beamforming
system, multiple input multiple output (MIMO) spatial multiplexing techniques, and space/spatial division multiple
access (SDMA). In summary, this course provides a strong foundation for advanced antenna technologies.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Outline key benefits and challenges of multiple antenna
techniques
x Provide examples of various types of multiple antenna
techniques
x Explain transmit and receive diversity techniques such as
Space Time Coding and antenna grouping
x Contrast a switched-beam system with an adaptive
beamforming technique
x Describe MIMO- Spatial Multiplexing techniques
x Discuss the implementation of SDMA
x Give examples of the multiple antenna techniques defined in
emerging 4G cellular networks
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a fundamental
understanding of how various multiple antenna techniques work.
This includes those in a design, test, systems engineering, sales
engineering, network engineering, or verification role.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Overview of 3G Wireless Networks (eLearning)
Complementary Courses
x Overview of OFDM (eLearning)
Average Course Length
3 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
Introduction to Antenna Techniques
x Antenna basics: transmit and receive
operation, antenna parameters, and
antenna gain characteristics
x Motivation for advanced antenna
techniques
x Example of antenna configurations: omni
and sectorized systems, 1 transmit and 1
receive antenna, 1 transmit and 2 receive
antennas with space and polarization
diversity
x Summary of multiple antenna techniques,
including advantages and challenges
Transmit and Receive Diversity Techniques
x Basic techniques (space, time, and
frequency)
x Advanced transmit diversity techniques
including STC, frequency/space, and
antenna grouping/selection
x Receive diversity
Beamforming Techniques
x Construction of a beam
x Transmit and receive beamforming
x Switched-beam system
x Adaptive beamforming system
x Benefits and challenges of beamforming
MIMO- Spatial Multiplexing
x Basics of spatial multiplexing
x Horizontal and vertical encoding, single-
code word and multi-code word
x MIMO Transmitter and Receiver
Examples
x Closed-loop MIMO (MIMO + precoding)
x Collaborative spatial multiplexing
x Benefits and challenges of MIMO-SM
Summary
Put It All Together
x Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the course objectives
by training with those who already are
expert
become
an
expert
become
an
1
x

&
1
x
E
V
-
D
O
1x & 1xEV-DO
New wireless services drive the evolution of an
emerging communications universe, with play-
ers from many disciplines and sectors, includ-
ing providers of information and entertainment
services. These players are coming together to
deliver new communications services charac-
terized by mobility with advanced multimedia
capabilities.
1x and 1xEV-DO provide access networks that
have evolved from the IS-95 radio interface.
In 2001, the 1x technology was released and
it continues to evolve with 1xEV-DO enhance-
ments that introduce new concepts and
features giving users a comprehensive and
personalized mobile experience available for
tomorrows Information Society.
About the Curriculum
Award Solutions 1x and 1xEV-DO training cur-
riculum presents a suite of courses that will
appeal to audiences seeking a deeper under-
standing of 1x or 1xEV-DO. These classes range
from conceptual overviews to detailed discus-
sions of the parameters and the rationale for
the current standards.
CDMA2000 Packet Data Networks eLearning Course
Instructor led Courses
Mastering 1x Networks &
Signaling
1x Radio Networks
Performance Workshop
1x RF Technicians Workshop
1xEV-DO Essentials
Mastering 1xEV-DO Networks &
Signaling (Rev A)
Mastering 1xEV-DO Networks &
Signaling (Rev 0 & A)
Mastering 1xEV-DO Radio
Networks (Rev B)
Mastering UMB Networks
1xEV-DO RF Mentoring
(Rev 0 & A)
1xEV-DO RF Technicians
Workshop
Mobile IP in 1x/1xEV-DO
Networks
MMD (IMS) in 1x/1xEV-DO
Networks
VoIP and SIP in 1x/1xEV-DO
MMD Networks
Self-paced eLearning
Courses
Overview of CDMA2000
Networks
CDMA2000 Air Interface
CDMA2000 Packet Data
Networks
Mobile IP for CDMA2000
1xEV-DO Networks
1xEV-DO Networks (Rev A)
Overview of MMD (IMS) in
1x/1xEV-DO Networks
57
58
1x & 1xEV-DO
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
1
x

&
1
x
E
V
-
D
O
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Mastering 1x Networks and Signaling
The idea of using a convenient wireless device for fast, anytime, anywhere access to the Internet can be quite
appealing. 3
rd
generation wireless systems promise to realize such a vision. CDMA2000 (1x) is the 3
rd
generation
solution for IS-95-based networks. This course covers the network architecture, CDMA protocol layers, call
processing state machine, registration, call setup procedures and handoff scenarios. It takes an in-depth look at the
enhancements to 1x, including features that support packet data services. This course describes the radio interface
enhancements and how 1x call processing is enhanced to support these features. The always connected paradigm
and call processing enhancements to support bandwidth on demand are explained. Paging and access channel
enhancements are clearly identified in this course. 1x enhancements related to mobility and power control are also
discussed. This course has several walkthroughs that bring together key concepts. It concludes with a comprehensive
journey through a concurrent voice and packet data session. Actual drive test mobile logs are used to reinforce the
1x call processing concepts.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Identify the components of a CDMA2000 (1x) network
x Define various identities of the mobile and network
components in 1x call processing
x Describe the importance of various states of the 1x call
processing state machine
x Identify the 1x radio enhancements for support of new
services such as packet data and multimedia services
x Step through the life of a 1x mobile from system selection
and registration to call setup and handoffs
x Recognize how to achieve a particular data rate and how to
change the data rates dynamically during a packet data
session
x Identify the importance of Mobile IP in 1x networks and step
through the Mobile IP call setup
x Sketch the connectivity of 1x network components and their
importance in setting up voice and data calls
Intended Audience
This is a detailed technical course, primarily intended for a
technical audience including those in system design, system
integration and test, systems engineering, network engineering,
operations, and support.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Overview of CDMA2000 Networks (eLearning)
Course Length
3 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. CDMA2000 Network Architecture
1.1. Network architecture, interfaces and
protocols of voice and data networks
1.2. CDMA2000 packet data network
components such as PDSN and AAA
2. CDMA Technology Essentials
2.1. Principles of CDMA
2.2. Use of Walsh and scrambling codes
2.3. Power control and handoffs
3. CDMA2000 Channels
3.1. Structure and operation of control
channels
3.2. Radio configurations
3.3. Use of FCH and SCH
4. Call Processing Terminology
4.1. Mobile station identities
4.2. Call processing state machine
4.3. Service options for voice and data
5. Pre-call Operations
5.1. Initialization and idle state procedures
5.2. Slotted mode paging
5.3. Quick paging channel operations
6. CDMA2000 (1x) Call Setup Procedures
6.1. System access enhancements
6.2. Access handoffs
6.3. Voice and packet call setup
7. Packet Data Call Setup and Mobile IP
7.1. Packet data network elements
7.2. Mobile IP call setup for 1x
8. Services in CDMA2000
8.1. Various supplementary services
8.2. SMS, PTT, OTASP
8.3. Use of R-UIM
8.4. Support for MEID
9. Traffic Channel Operations for Data Call
9.1. Resource management of SCH
9.2. Use of RLP
9.3. Active and dormant state management
10. Mobility and Handoffs
10.1. Registrations and idle handoff
10.2. Soft handoff and soft slope algorithm
11. Power Control
11.1. Open and close loop power control
11.2. Fast forward link power control
12. End-to-End Scenario
12.1. Voice and packet data services
59
1x & 1xEV-DO
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
1
x

&
1
x
E
V
-
D
O
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
1x Radio Networks Performance Workshop
CDMA2000 (1x) is designed for increased capacity for voice and high-speed packet data services. Benefits can only
be realized if the network is optimized to operate at peak performance. This course provides an in-depth technical
overview of the optimization mechanisms available in CDMA2000 radio networks. It begins with an overview of
the CDMA2000 network and its key features, and includes details of new parameters available when provisioning
the network. The remainder of the course delves into each step in the life of a CDMA2000 mobile, from idle mode
performance through system access, voice and data call setup, the resource management phase, and the optimization
of the active state. Both voice and packet data performance optimizations (ineffective attempts, call drops, data
throughput at physical, RLP, TCP and application layers) are explored, with focus given to the areas of handoff and
power control. The effects of various radio configurations on system capacity are discussed. Each topic is reinforced
with the use of in-class exercises based on data collected from a live CDMA2000 network.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Describe the rationale and key optimization areas within the
CDMA2000 radio network
x Analyze how to optimize a radio network with various levels
of CDMA2000 penetration
x Describe the CDMA2000 idle mode and access procedures
x List the optimization techniques that can be applied to radio
resource management for voice and data services
x Distinguish the impact of various types of handoffs on
network performance
x Quantify the impact of new power control schemes within
CDMA2000 and how to utilize them for optimization
x Measure the impact of packet data traffic on the RAN and
learn the mechanisms defined to tune packet data
performance for both network capacity and user data
throughput
Intended Audience
This in-depth course is intended for a technical audience,
primarily those in RF engineering, RF performance, system
performance, RF design or planning organizations.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Mastering 1x Networks and Signaling (Instructor led)
Course Length
3 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Introduction
1.1. Rationale for optimization
1.2. CDMA2000 network optimization
opportunities
2. Overview of the CDMA2000 Network
2.1. CDMA2000 network architecture
2.2. Features of CDMA2000
3. Idle & Access Operations
3.1. Optimization within a voice call setup
3.2. Optimization within a data session setup
3.3. Access performance enhancements
4. Voice Operations
4.1. New radio configurations
4.2. Capacity improvements of 1x systems
5. Packet Data Operations
5.1. RLP, MUX/QoS layer optimization
5.2. Active-Dormant management
5.3. Impact of Internet protocols
5.4. Supplemental channel management
6. Resource Management
6.1. Voice and data blocking thresholds
6.2. Voice versus data priority management
6.3. Walsh code management
6.4. Power management
6.5. Multi-carrier considerations
7. Handoff
7.1. Soft, hard and dormant handoff issues
7.2. Handoff thresholds
7.3. Supplemental Channel handoff
management
8. Power Control
8.1. Forward and reverse link power control
8.2. Reverse pilot benefits and control
8.3. Power control and capacity
8.4. Power control of Supplemental
Channels
9. Looking Ahead
9.1. 1xEV-DO Network Overview
60
1x & 1xEV-DO
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
1
x

&
1
x
E
V
-
D
O
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
1x RF Technicians Workshop
CDMA2000 (1x) is designed for increased capacity for voice and high-speed packet data services. Benefits can only
be realized if the network is optimized to operate at peak performance. This unique 2-day workshop is designed to
provide technicians (field, cell, RF) and operations and support personnel of 1x operators with the necessary
technical knowledge and skills to assess and effectively troubleshoot issues faced by customers in their respective
markets. The participants step through the key operations of voice and data calls in 1x system. In addition, the
participants gain valuable on-the-job experience with hands-on analytical and troubleshooting techniques.
Note: The workshop is a combination of instructor led training with in-class data analysis of data collected in a
specific market using the technicians drive test and post-processing tools.
Learning Objectives
After completing this workshop, the student will be able to:
x Describe and demonstrate the tools available in the local
market
x Explain the key features within the 1x radio network and
their impact on performance
x Use the troubleshooting and optimization techniques for
improving voice and data services
x List key tunable parameters and their effects on system
performance
x Determine the log masks most appropriate for specific
troubleshooting scenarios
x Analyze the air interface logs to resolve radio network
performance problems and improve system performance

Intended Audience
This workshop is intended for technicians (field, cell, RF)
operating on the field who require the necessary knowledge and
skills to capture, identify, analyze and troubleshoot issues in a 1x
radio network.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Overview of CDMA2000 Networks (eLearning) or a good
understanding of the workings of 1x networks
x Familiarity with drive test and post-processing tools and
appropriate licenses on the PC
Workshop Length
2 day Instructor led
Special Notes
Marketspecific drive test logs, configuration data, as well as vendor
documentation are needed three weeks prior to the workshop to
delivermaximumvaluefortheattendees
Course Outline
1. 1x Radio Network Refresher
1.1. 1x network architecture
1.2. Forward and reverse channels of 1x
1.3. Overview of voice call setup
1.4. Overview of data call setup
1.5. Soft and hard handoff procedures
1.6. Power control procedures
2. Mobile Data Collection and Logging
2.1. Mobile data collection tools
2.2. Features and capabilities of the tool
2.3. Example mobile logs and description of
various fields
2.4. Use of optimal log masks for logging
2.5. Use of frequently used displays
3. System Acquisition, Idle and Access
Operations
3.1. System acquisition in 1x
3.2. Use of MRU and PRL
3.3. Explanation of key messages like
GSRM, channel list, neighbor list
3.4. Paging and Quick Paging operations
3.5. System access and access handoffs
4. Root Cause Analysis for Access Failures
4.1. Signatures of access failure
4.2. Analysis of pre- and post-failure logs
4.3. Resolving access failures
5. Root Cause Analysis for Call Drops
5.1. Signatures of call drops
5.2. Analysis of pre- and post-call drop logs
5.3. Resolving call drops
6. Root Cause Analysis for Poor Voice Quality
6.1. Voice quality measurements
6.2. Mobile logs with poor voice quality
6.3. Methods to improve voice quality
7. Root Cause Analysis for Poor Data
Throughput
7.1. Signatures of poor data throughput
7.2. Poor throughput log analysis
7.3. Methods of increasing throughput
61
1x & 1xEV-DO
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
1
x

&
1
x
E
V
-
D
O
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
1xEV-DO Essentials
CDMA operators have completed the upgrade of their wireless networks to CDMA2000, also known as 1x. The goal
is to efficiently support higher data rates in both the forward and reverse directions. Enhancements to the 1x systems
are needed to offer packet data services at rates greater than 2 Mbps. In addition, operators are anxious to introduce
new services such as VoIP, broadcast/multicast and Push-to-Talk. The next step in the 1x network evolution is
commonly known as 1xEV-DO (1x EVolution for Data Optimized). As the industry begins to introduce this new
technology, this course puts you ahead of the curve and prepares you for the transition. The key concepts that enable
high data rates are explained. Most importantly, this course provides a complete system view of 1xEV-DO (Rev 0
and Rev A) networks, with an emphasis on features and capabilities/limitations. This course provides an overview of
1xEV-DO technology (frame structure, life of a 1xEV-DO mobile), end-to-end data connection setup between the
AT and the Internet, deployment strategies, and interworking scenarios between 1xEV-DO and 1x. It also provides a
comparative landscape of 1xEV-DO with other wireless networks such as UMTS and WiMAX.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Specify the motivation for the 1xEV-DO system
x Discuss the status of 1xEV-DO, related standards and key
players
x Sketch the 1xEV-DO network architecture and interfaces
x Discuss key features of 1xEV-DO (Rev 0 & Rev A) networks
such as data rates, QoS and Security
x List key concepts and operations of the 1xEV-DO air
interface
x Devise a strategy for deploying the 1xEV-DO system
x Examine the key differences between 1xEV-DO and
competing technologies
Intended Audience
This overview course is primarily intended for a marketing, sales
and executive managment audience interested in a conceptual
understanding of the architecture, attributes and future of the
1xEV-DO networks.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Mastering 1x Networks and Signaling (Instructor led)
x 1xEV-DO Networks (eLearning)
Course Length
1 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Motivation and Overview
1.1. Limitations of CDMA2000 (1x)
1.2. Need for data rates over 2 Mbps
1.3. Peak and average data rates
1.4. Motivation for Rev A
2. Network Architecture
2.1. 1xEV-DO network architecture
2.2. Air interface and network standards
3. Features and Services
3.1. Higher rates for forward and reverse
links
3.2. QoS support for real-time data services
(e.g., VoIP)
3.3. Interactions with 1x networks
3.4. Limitations and challenges
4. 1xEV-DO Technology Overview
4.1. Link adaptation and fast cell selection
4.2. Adaptive coding and modulation
4.3. Hybrid ARQ operations
4.4. Sessions and connections
5. 1xEV-DO Operations
5.1. Data session setup in 1xEV-DO
5.2. Forward Link and Reverse Link
operations
5.3. End-to-end connection from AT to the
Internet
6. Deployment and Upgrade Strategies
6.1. Overlay deployment of 1xEV-DO
6.2. Backwards compatibility with 1x
6.3. Interworking between 1xEV-DO and 1x
7. Competitive Landscape
7.1. Future directions for 1xEV-DO
7.2. UMTS Evolution HSDPA & HSUPA
7.3. WiMAX
62
1x & 1xEV-DO
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
1
x

&
1
x
E
V
-
D
O
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Mastering 1xEV-DO Networks & Signaling
(Rev A)
1xEV-DO (1x EVolution for Data Optimized) allows CDMA operators to provide higher data rates and more
capacity in their CDMA2000 (1x) networks. Revision 0 of 1xEV-DO supports peak data rates of over 2 Mbps,
providing broadband access to wireless data, while Revision A enhances the ability of the 1xEV-DO network to
provide a rich user experience with services such as Voice over IP (VoIP), video telephony, and video streaming,
while also increasing the peak data rates in the reverse link. This course provides a comprehensive look at 1xEV-DO
(Rev A). It describes the enhancements in Rev A to improve performance and throughput. The roles of protocols,
the forward and reverse link structure, as well as the channels and their functions are discussed in detail. This course
provides a detailed analysis of the signaling messages and relevant parameters. Interworking between 1x and 1xEV-
DO networks and the operation of hybrid ATs are fully explained. The course concludes with a discussion of how
Quality of Service (QoS) is implemented in 1xEV-DO (Rev A).
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Review the design goals of 1xEV-DO Rev 0 and the
motivations for Rev A
x Highlight the forward link enhancements in Rev A
x Describe the reverse link enhancements in Rev A and walk
through the new operations of T2P
x Identify how mobility is supported in the access and packet
data networks
x Discuss the functions of the access and control channels and
describe the initial setup sequence of a 1xEV-DO AT
x List the mechanisms designed to allow hybrid ATs to operate
in both 1x and 1xEV-DO networks
x Understand how QoS is achieved across the 1xEV-DO
network
Intended Audience
This in-depth course is primarily intended for wireless network
operators, particularly those involved in cell planning and design,
RF engineering, system optimization, RF management, and
technical support and operations.
Suggested Prerequisites
x 1xEV-DO Networks (eLearning)
x 1xEV-DO Networks (Rev A) (eLearning)
Course Length
2 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Overview of 1xEV-DO
1.1. 1xEV-DO network architecture
1.2. Motivations for Rev A
2. Forward Link Operations
2.1. Forward link enhancements of Rev A
2.2. Use of MAC Index in Rev 0 & Rev A
2.3. Transmission formats in Rev A
2.4. Multi-user packets
2.5. Factors affecting forward link
performance
3. Reverse Link Operations
3.1. Reverse link MAC subtypes
3.2. Frame and sub-frame structures
3.3. Channels and their operations
3.4. T2P operation
3.5. Reverse link Hybrid ARQ
3.6. Factors affecting reverse link
performance
4. Signaling Operations
4.1. Control channel signaling
4.2. Access channel signaling
5. Session Establishment
5.1. Default and non-default protocols
5.2. Address and session management
5.3. Multiple personalities and GAUP
6. Mobility
6.1. Fast sector switching and handoffs
6.2. Data source control
6.3. Core network mobility and the role of
Mobile IP
7. 1xEV-DO & 1x Interworking
7.1. Multi-mode terminals
7.2. Paging channel monitoring
7.3. Inter-technology handoffs
8. QoS in 1xEV-DO
8.1. End-to-end QoS requirements
8.2. Multi-flow packet application

63
1x & 1xEV-DO
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
1
x

&
1
x
E
V
-
D
O
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Mastering 1xEV-DO Networks & Signaling
(Rev 0 & A)
1xEV-DO (1x EVolution for Data Optimized) allows CDMA operators to provide higher data rates and more
capacity in their CDMA2000 (1x) networks. Revision 0 of 1xEV-DO supports peak data rates of over 2 Mbps,
providing broadband access to wireless data. Revision A enhances the ability of the 1xEV-DO network to provide a
rich user experience with services such as Voice over IP (VoIP), video telephony, and video streaming, while also
increasing the peak data rates in the reverse link. This course provides a comprehensive look at 1xEV-DO (Rev 0
and Rev A). It explains the basic design and operation of Rev 0 and describes Rev A enhancements to improve
performance and throughput. The roles of protocols, the forward and reverse link structure as well as channels and
their functions are detailed. This course provides a detailed analysis of the signaling messages and relevant
parameters. Interworking between 1x and 1xEV-DO networks and the operation of hybrid ATs are fully explained.
The course concludes with a discussion of how Quality of Service (QoS) is implemented in 1xEV-DO (Rev A).
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Review the design goals of 1xEV-DO Rev 0 and the
motivations for Rev A
x Describe the basic operation of the 1xEV-DO forward link
and how high peak data rates are achieved
x Explain the operation of the 1xEV-DO Rev 0 reverse link
and the enhancements implemented in Rev A
x Identify how mobility is supported in the access and packet
data networks
x Discuss the functions of the access and control channels and
describe the initial setup sequence of a 1xEV-DO AT
x List the mechanisms designed to allow hybrid ATs to operate
in both 1x and 1xEV-DO networks
x Understand how QoS is achieved across the 1xEV-DO
network
Intended Audience
This in-depth course is primarily intended for wireless network
operators, particularly those involved in cell planning and design,
RF engineering, system optimization, RF management, and
technical support and operations.
Suggested Prerequisites
x 1xEV-DO Networks (eLearning)
x 1xEV-DO Networks (Rev A) (eLearning)
Course Length
3 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Overview of 1xEV-DO
1.1. 1xEV-DO network architecture
1.2. 1xEV-DO Rev 0 design goals
1.3. Motivations for Rev A
2. Forward Link Operations
2.1. TDM structure of the forward link
2.2. Role of data rate control and AMC
2.3. Behavior of forward link scheduler
2.4. Use of MAC index in Rev 0 & Rev A
2.5. Transmission formats in Rev A
2.6. Adaptive coding and role of HARQ
2.7. Multi-user packets
2.8. Factors affecting forward link
performance
3. Reverse Link Operations
3.1. Reverse link MAC subtypes
3.2. Frame and sub-frame structures
3.3. Channels and their operations
3.4. Transition probabilities
3.5. T2P operation
3.6. Reverse Link Hybrid ARQ
3.7. Factors affecting reverse link
performance
4. Signaling Operations
4.1. Packet processing
4.2. Control channel signaling
4.3. Access channel signaling
5. Session Establishment
5.1. Default and non-default protocols
5.2. Address and session management
5.3. Multiple personalities and GAUP
6. Mobility
6.1. Fast sector switching and handoffs
6.2. Data source control
6.3. Core network mobility and the role of
Mobile IP
7. 1xEV-DO & 1x Interworking
7.1. Multi-mode terminals
7.2. Paging channel monitoring
7.3. Inter-technology handoffs
8. QoS in 1xEV-DO
8.1. End-to-end QoS requirements
8.2. Multi-flow packet application

64
1x & 1xEV-DO
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
1
x

&
1
x
E
V
-
D
O
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Mastering 1xEV-DO Radio Networks (Rev B)
1xEV-DO (1x EVolution for Data Optimized) technology allows CDMA operators to provide higher data rates and
more capacity in their CDMA2000 (1x) networks. The current revision, Rev A, delivers peak data rates of up to 3
Mbps, providing a rich user experience while delivering exciting services such as Voice over IP (VoIP), video
telephony, and video streaming. As the industry contemplates the next generation of mobile wireless technology, a
new revision, 1xEV-DO (Rev B), offers an intermediate step to even higher data rates (up to 78 Mbps), while still
maintaining backwards compatibility with previous releases. This course provides an understanding of the
capabilities provided in Rev B (also called NxEV-DO) networks to deliver these higher data rates, allowing a single
device to simultaneously use up to 16 forward and reverse links. The roles of enhanced protocols, the new link
structure, as well as the channels and their operations in a Rev B network are discussed at great length. Deployment
strategies for introducing Rev B into existing networks are discussed, as well as methods for supporting Rev 0, Rev
A and Rev B devices in the same network. The course concludes with a discussion of scenarios for establishing and
maintaining sessions and connections across various handoff situations.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Identify the motivations and goals of 1xEV-DO (Rev B)
networks
x Explain the concepts of Multi-Channel Multiplexing (MCM)
x List the changes to the forward and reverse channels
x Describe the enhanced operations of the forward and reverse
links
x Discuss the impact to system operations, including session
configuration, mobility and packet delivery
x Explain how Rev B networks may be deployed in the field
and how support for Rev 0 and Rev A devices is maintained
Intended Audience
This in-depth course is primarily intended for a technical
audience, including those in product management, product design
and development, system design, system test, system engineering,
network engineering, product support, and operations. This course
requires an undestanding of 1xEV-DO (Rev A).
Suggested Prerequisites
x Mastering 1xEV-DO Networks & Signaling (Rev A)
(Instructor led)
Course Length
1 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Overview of 1xEV-DO Rev B
1.1. Motivation and goals
1.2. Comparison of Rev 0, Rev A and Rev B
1.3. Features of Rev B
1.4. Air interface protocols
1.5. Deployment options
1.6. Backwards compatibility
2. Multi-Carrier Concepts
2.1. Multi-Carrier Multiplexing (MCM)
2.2. NxEV-DO
2.3. Pilot groups
2.4. Scheduling groups
2.5. Sub-Active sets
2.6. FL and RL feedback mechanisms
3. Forward Link Operations
3.1. New physical layer format and channels
3.2. Forward and reverse MAC indices
3.3. Optional transmission formats
3.4. Extended spans
4. Reverse Link Operations
4.1. New physical layer format and channels
4.2. Feedback multiplexing
4.3. DTX mode
4.4. Reverse link power control
4.5. Reverse channel dropping
4.6. Multi-carrier route update
5. Session and Connections Management
5.1. Secondary color codes
5.2. Multi-carrier connection setup
5.3. Active set management
6. Mobility and Handoff
6.1. Multi-carrier handoff
65
1x & 1xEV-DO
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
1
x

&
1
x
E
V
-
D
O
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Mastering UMB Networks
CDMA2000 (1x/1xEV-DO) networks continue to evolve in the pursuit of higher data rates and increased capacity.
Ultra Mobile Broadband (UMB) is an evolution of the 1x/1xEV-DO networks that leverages the power of OFDM
and MIMO technologies to provide significantly higher data rates (over 100 Mbps). As a result, wireless operators
can offer a rich user experience by supporting advanced multimedia applications. This course describes the UMB
architecture and explains how OFDM and MIMO are used to facilitate higher data rates. OFDM operations at the
physical layer as well as resource management and scheduling considerations at the MAC layer are examined. This
course also covers deployment and interworking issues with 1x/1xEV-DO and other access technologies such as
WiMAX networks. In addition, it describes the competitive landscape by comparing features and services of other
4G systems such as WiMAX and UMTS LTE. By the end of this course, students will have a comprehensive
understanding of UMB networks and its place in next generation networks.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Highlight the limitations of current 3G wireless networks and
list the motivating factors for 4G
x Describe the use of OFDM and multiple antenna techniques
in 4G technologies
x Compare OFDM operations with CDMA
x Explain how the network architecture of UMB is designed to
support the mobile wireless Internet
x Identify the following aspects of UMB networks:
Architecture, capabilities and capacity
Radio Access Network and air interface details
High speed data support
Services and Quality of Service
x Compare and contrast the features of air interface of UMB
with UMTS-LTE and Mobile WiMAX
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those interested in an in-depth
understanding of UMB networks. It is suited for product
planning and design engineers, product managers and
development and test engineers.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Mastering 1xEV-DO Networks & Signaling (Rev 0 & A)
(Instructor led)
Course Length
2 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Introduction
1.1. Limitations of 3G networks
1.2. 4G technology and market drivers
1.3. High data rate requirements
1.4. Drivers for UMB networks
1.5. Underlying technology OFDM and
simplified core network
2. UMB Networks
2.1. Evolving network architecture
2.2. Interfaces and protocols
2.3. Evolution path of 1x/1xEV-DO to UMB
3. OFDMA and Multiple Antenna Essentials
3.1. OFDM signal definition
3.2. Multi-path and cyclic prefix
3.3. Subcarriers and subchannels
3.4. Concepts of OFDMA
3.5. OFDM vs. CDMA
3.6. Multiple antenna techniques
4. UMB Air Interface
4.1. Key concepts
4.2. Forward link frame structure
4.3. Reverse link frame structure
4.4. Physical layer operations
4.5. Support for MIMO
5. Signaling and Traffic Operations
5.1. System acquisition and Idle state
procedures
5.2. Resource management strategies
5.3. Traffic operations in forward and
reverse links
5.4. Reverse link power control
5.5. Handoffs and serving sector selection
6. Deployment and Interworking
6.1. Interworking with 1x/1xEV-DO
6.2. Interworking with other 4G systems
7. 4G Technologies Comparison
7.1. Compare and contrast with WiMAX and
UMTS LTE
66
1x & 1xEV-DO
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
1
x

&
1
x
E
V
-
D
O
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
1xEV-DO RF Mentoring (Rev 0 & A)
1xEV-DO (1x EVolution for Data Optimized) allows CDMA operators to provide higher data rates and more
capacity in their 1x networks. This unique mentoring workshop delves deep into the behavior of 1xEV-DO in real-
world environments, providing insights into the symptoms and possible causes of field performance issues. This
workshop is divided into two parts: 1) on-site kickoff (3 days), and 2) online mentoring sessions (four weekly half-
day sessions). The workshop begins with a discussion on Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) of 1xEV-DO, with
emphasis on the impact of configuration parameters and RF conditions. It covers the key operational aspects of
1xEV-DO, such as session and connection management, forward and reverse link throughput, and QoS to support
real-time services. This is followed by a series of online analytical exercises based on actual field data, designed to
familiarize the students with the tools and techniques to optimize and troubleshoot their own markets. At the end of
the workshop, each student will have a detailed understanding of the 1xEV-DO KPIs and hands-on practice in
detecting and diagnosing problems in the field.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Describe the Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) of the
1xEV-DO network and the factors affecting them
x Explain the detailed operation of the 1xEV-DO system
x Identify the key parameters and conditions that affect 1xEV-
DO throughput, latency and performance
x Identify the vendor-specific settings needed to configure
1xEV-DO in their markets
x Incorporate post-processing tools to analyze common
performance-related scenarios
x Describe specific recommendations on how to address
specific field issues
Intended Audience
This in-depth workshop is intended for wireless network
operators, particularly RF professionals involved in cell planning
and design, system design, RF engineering, and RF optimization.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Mastering 1xEV-DO Networks & Signaling (Rev 0 & A)
(Instructor led)
x Familiarity with drive test and post-processing tools
Workshop Length
3 day on-site kickoff session, plus four weekly half-day online
mentoring sessions
SpecialNote
Marketspecific drive test logs, configuration data, as well as vendor
documentationareneededthreeweekspriortothementoringsessions
todelivermaximumvaluefortheattendees.
Kickoff Session Outline
1. Performance of 1xEV-DO
1.1. Key concepts of 1xEV-DO
1.2. Key Performance Indicators (KPIs)
1.3. Forward and reverse link operations
1.4. Session and connections setup
1.5. Radio mobility and handoffs
1.6. Throughput and latency
1.7. Critical configuration parameters
2. Session and Connection Performance
2.1. Session setup success and failures
2.2. Connection setup success and failures
2.3. Connection drops
2.4. Related network parameters
3. Forward Link Throughput
3.1. Application (TCP) throughput
3.2. RLP throughput
3.3. MAC and PHY throughput
3.4. Impact of hybrid mode
3.5. Related network parameters
4. Reverse Link Throughput
4.1. Fast data rate changes
4.2. Reverse link loading
4.3. Data rate determination (T2P)
4.4. Impact of forward link
4.5. Related network parameters
5. QoS Performance
5.1. QoS coordination
5.2. QoS negotiation
5.3. Low-latency services
5.4. Multi-flow RLP
5.5. Relateu netwoik paiameteis
Mentoring Sessions
1. Connection Performance
2. Forward Link Throughput
3. Reverse Link Throughput
4. QoS Performance
67
1x & 1xEV-DO
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
1
x

&
1
x
E
V
-
D
O
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
1xEV-DO RF Technicians Workshop

1x EVolution for Data Optimized (1xEV-DO) is designed for significantly higher data rates. Benefits can only be
realized if the network is optimized to operate at peak performance. This unique workshop is designed to provide
technicians (field/cell, RF) and operations and support personnel of 1xEV-DO operators with the necessary technical
knowledge and skills to assess and effectively troubleshoot issues faced by customers in their respective markets.
The participants step through the key operations of data calls in the 1xEV-DO system. In addition, the participants
gain valuable on-the-job experience with hands-on analytical and troubleshooting techniques.
Note: The workshop is a combination of instructor led training with in-class data analysis of data collected in a
specific market, using the technicians drive test and post-processing tools.

Learning Objectives
After completing this workshop, the student will be able to:
x Describe and demonstrate the tools available in the local
market
x Explain the key features within the 1xEV-DO radio network
and their impact on performance
x Utilize troubleshooting and optimization techniques for
improving data services
x Identify key tunable parameters and their effects on system
performance
x Recognize the log masks most appropriate for specific
troubleshooting scenarios
x Analyze the air interface logs to resolve radio network
performance problems and improve system performance
Intended Audience
This workshop is intended for technicians (field/cell, RF)
operating on the field who require the necessary knowledge and
skills to capture, identify, analyze and troubleshoot issues in a
1xEV-DO radio network.
Suggested Prerequisites
x 1xEV-DO Networks (eLearning)
x 1xEV-DO Networks (Rev A) (eLearning)
x Familiarity with drive test and post-processing tools and
appropriate licenses on the PC
Workshop Length
2 day Instructor led
Special Notes
Marketspecific drive test logs, configuration data, as well as vendor
documentation are needed three weeks prior to the workshop to
delivermaximumvaluefortheattendees
Course Outline
1. 1xEV-DO Radio Network Refresher
1.1. 1xEV-DO network architecture
1.2. Forward and reverse channels of 1xEV-
DO
1.3. Overview of data call setup
1.4. Relationship of C/I and DRC
2. Mobile Data Collection and Logging
2.1. Mobile data collection tools
2.2. Features and capabilities of the tool
2.3. Example mobile logs and description of
various fields
2.4. Use of optimal log masks for logging
2.5. Use of frequently used displays
3. Session Setup and Idle Mode Operations
3.1. System selection in 1xEV-DO
3.2. Use of MRU and PRL
3.3. Explanation of key overhead messages
3.4. Paging and access operations
4. Connection Setup Analysis
4.1. Signatures of connection setup failures
4.2. Analysis of pre- and post-failure logs
4.3. Resolving connection failures
5. Forward Link Throughput Analysis
5.1. Signatures of poor FL throughput
5.2. Poor throughput log analysis
5.3. Methods of increasing throughput
6. Reverse Link Throughput Analysis
6.1. Signatures of poor RL throughput
6.2. Poor throughput log analysis
6.3. Methods of increasing throughput
7. QoS Performance
7.1. Mobile logs with QoS messages
68
1x & 1xEV-DO
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
1
x

&
1
x
E
V
-
D
O
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Mobile IP in 1x/1xEV-DO Networks
As CDMA networks continue to evolve, the use of IP technologies continues to increase. 1xEV-DO (1x EVolution
for Data Optimized) networks have been deployed in many countries, opening the door to multimedia applications
that require high data rates. This course provides a thorough introduction to the IP technologies used in CDMA2000
(1x) & 1xEV-DO networks. Simple IP access is explored with an emphasis on the R-P interface and PPP
connections. An introduction to the basic architecture of Mobile IP follows. New resource management features
that allow the packet network components to release resources at the earliest opportunity are also discussed.
Optional features are discussed, including Mobile IP VPN, Always-On and other value added features. Major
aspects of security in CDMA networks are explained in simple terms. Real-time data applications such as Voice
over IP are introduced into CDMA networks and set the stage for the creation of a new wave of multimedia
applications that will combine voice, video and data. In support of these new services, CDMA networks deploy QoS
and seamless mobility features that are examined in some detail. The course concludes with an introduction to both
IPv6 and Mobile IPv6.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Sketch a simple IP architecture, the associated protocol
reference model and limitations of this access method
x Describe the MIP protocol and the role of the Home Agent
and Foreign Agent
x List the resources that are used in the packet data network,
and distinguish between various methods for managing these
resources
x Explain the key features that support and enhance QoS, data
roaming, accounting and IP address management
x Sketch the Mobile IP related security architectures defined in
CDMA for user access authentication and data privacy
x Describe seamless mobility related features such as bi-casting
and fast handoff, and understand the role of the P-P interface
x Sketch the key features of IPv6, and understand how IPv6
will be deployed in 1x and 1xEV-DO networks
Intended Audience
This course is intended for a technical audience, primarily those
in network planning and design, product development, integration
and testing, and deployment functions.
Suggested Prerequisites
x ATM and IP Fundamentals (Instructor led)
x Mastering 1x Networks and Signaling (Instructor led)
x 1xEV-DO Networks (eLearning)
Course Length
2 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Overview of Simple IP in 1x/1xEV-DO
1.1. Role of PCF, PDSN and AAA
1.2. R-P and PPP interfaces
1.3. Intra-PDSN handoff
2. Mobile IP Implementation in 1x/1xEV-DO
2.1. The limitations of Simple IP
2.2. Mobile IP architecture
2.3. Role of HA and FA
2.4. Mobile IP registration process
2.5. Call setup messaging
2.6. IP packet tunneling in Mobile IP
2.7. Handoff across PDSNs
3. Resource Management
3.1. Dynamic authentication extensions
3.2. Registration revocation in MIP
3.3. Examination of key resource timers
4. Advanced Mobility Features for 1x/1xEV-DO
4.1. Always on support
4.2. Dynamic home agent allocation
4.3. Private network access with Mobile IP
4.4. IP reachability service via DNS update
4.5. QoS features for real-time support
4.6. Accounting and prepaid architecture
4.7. CDMA roaming exchange
5. IP Security in Mobile IP networks
5.1. Security architecture
5.2. Access authentication and DMU
5.3. IPSec support in Mobile IP
5.4. IKE review
6. Seamless Mobility
6.1. Inter- and Intra-technology handoffs
6.2. P-P Interface
6.3. Fast handoffs
6.4. WLAN interworking scenarios
6.5. 3GPP2-WLAN authentication options
6.6. Packet data service access from WLAN
6.7. 3GPP2WLAN Session Continuity
7. IPv6 in CDMA2000 Networks
7.1. Support for IPv6 and Mobile IPv6
7.2. Route optimization
8. End-to-End Mobile IP Session Scenarios
69
1x & 1xEV-DO
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
1
x

&
1
x
E
V
-
D
O
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
MMD (IMS) in 1x/1xEV-DO Networks
The Multimedia Domain (MMD) is a significant evolution of the CDMA core network and is focused on service
delivery. MMD provides a structure that fulfills the promise of 3G, allowing a combination of real-time and non-
real-time services to be delivered to a single device. Because MMD is access network independent, it promotes
interoperability between wireline, cellular, WLAN and other network types. This course provides an overview of the
CDMA2000 Multimedia Domain (MMD), which includes the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS). It also explains how
1x and 1xEV-DO (1x EVolution for Data Optimized) access networks interwork with MMD, and explores various
aspects of MMD including architecture, network components and interfaces. It provides the student with an
understanding of underlying technologies such as SIP and SDP, and how they are used within the All-IP Multimedia
Domain architecture. This course also covers the IP Multimedia call model, call control protocols, signaling,
message flow, accounting and the charging architecture.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x List the driving forces, requirements and goals of the All-IP
Multimedia Domain (MMD) in 1x/1xEV-DO networks
x Identify the building blocks used to construct MMD
x List the functions of the MMD architecture that support
multimedia functions
x Describe the roles of SIP and the enabling technologies used
in the architecture
x Explain how functions such as mobility, roaming and call
processing are carried out in the new architecture
x Step through end-to-end service establishment flows in the IP
architecture
x Describe how 1x and 1xEV-DO networks are evolving to
take advantage of MMD
x Sketch scenarios that illustrate interworking with the PSTN
and legacy wireless networks
Intended Audience
This overview course is intended for product management,
planners, architects and designers who need an overview of IP
Multimedia Networks in 1x/1xEV-DO.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Mastering 1x Networks and Signaling (Instructor led)
x 1xEV-DO Networks (eLearning)
Course Length
2 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Introduction to MMD
1.1. Review of the VoIP revolution
1.2. VoIP signaling and protocols
1.3. MMD and other next generation networks
1.4. IMS & MMD reference architectures
2. SIP Overview
2.1. SIP architectural components
2.2. SIP session basics and SDP
2.3. Registration and authentication
2.4. SIP extensibility
3. MMD Architecture
3.1. Session control functions
3.2. The role of application servers
3.3. MGW, MRF, BGCF, HSS
4. MMD Registration
4.1. Establishing the Serving CSCF
4.2. MMD Authentication
5. Call Processing
5.1. Media negotiating
5.2. Mobile-to-Mobile call flow
5.3. PSTN Interworking
6. Charging
6.1. IMS/MMD charging concepts
6.2. Offline and online models
7. MMD Services
7.1. Public and private identifiers
7.2. Service profiles & triggers
7.3. Role of AS
8. Quality of Service in VoIP
8.1. QoS Issues in wireless
8.2. 1xEV-DO solutions
9. Transitioning from 1x to MMD
9.1. Evolution from 1x to 1xEV-DO to MMD
core networks
70
1x & 1xEV-DO
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
1
x

&
1
x
E
V
-
D
O
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
VoIP and SIP in 1x/1xEV-DO MMD Networks
The transmission of voice over packet data networks represents a radical shift for wireless networks. Issues related
to Quality of Service (QoS) and security rise in importance as wireless service providers seek to provide Voice over
IP (VoIP) services. Service providers are enhancing their networks to support VoIP and multimedia services using
IP Multimedia networks. The Multimedia Domain (MMD) focuses on multimedia service delivery, and is a
significant evolution of the CDMA core network. MMD promotes interoperability among wireline, cellular, WLAN
and other types of networks. This course illustrates how VoIP and related services are supported using the Session
Initiation Protocol (SIP) in 1x/1xEV-DO Multimedia Domain (MMD) networks, including the IP Multimedia
Subsystem (IMS). In addition, it provides students with an understanding of enabling protocols such as SIP, SDP,
Megaco, and DIAMETER. Various call scenarios such as registration, deregistration, call origination and
termination, session renegotiation, accounting and charging, and QoS management are also explored.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Sketch a network diagram for VoIP service
x List the driving forces, requirements and goals of the IP
MMD in 1x/1xEV-DO networks
x Identify the building blocks used to construct MMD
x List the functions of the MMD architecture that support
multimedia functions
x Describe how SIP and related protocols are used in the MMD
network to support VoIP
x Explain how functions such as mobility, roaming and call
processing are performed in the new architecture
x Step through end-to-end service establishment flows in the IP
architecture
x Describe how 1x and 1xEV-DO networks have evolved to
take advantage of MMD
x Sketch scenarios that illustrate interworking with the PSTN,
WLAN and legacy wireless networks
Intended Audience
This overview course is primarily intended for product
management, planners, architects and designers who need an
overview of VoIP, SIP and IP multimedia networks in 1x/1xEV-
DO.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Mastering 1x Networks and Signaling (Instructor led)
x 1xEV-DO Networks (eLearning)
Course Length
3 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Introduction to Voice over IP
1.1. VoIP Perspectives: Consumer, enterprise
and service providers
1.2. Network architecture for VoIP
2. SIP Signaling and Related Operations
2.1. SIP architecture components
2.2. Session Description Protocol (SDP)
2.3. Registration and call setup
2.4. SIP Features
3. Multimedia Domain (MMD) in 1x/1xEV-DO
3.1. Motivation for IP multimedia networks
3.2. Reference architecture and role of CSCF
3.3. Interfaces and protocols
4. Registration in MMD/IMS
4.1. Registration and authentication
4.2. Roles of P-CSCF, S-CSCF and HSS
5. Basic Call Scenarios in MMD/IMS
5.1. Call origination and termination
5.2. Session renegotiation
5.3. Mobile-to-Mobile & Mobile-to-PSTN
6. Accounting in MMD/IMS
6.1. Charging concepts and terminology
6.2. Offline and online charging
7. Multimedia Transport Mechanism
7.1. Real-time traffic management
7.2. Voice coding techniques
7.3. RTP and RTCP
8. VoIP/IP Telephony in 1xEV-DO
8.1. Service-based bearer control
8.2. Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF)
8.3. QoS in 1xEV-DO
8.4. Header compression techniques
8.5. Multi-flow RLP and Multi-user packets
9. Interworking
9.1. Interworking with PSTN and WLAN
10. MMD Services
10.1. Push-to-Talk (PTT or PoC)
10.2. Presence and messaging
10.3. Conferencing
11. Voice Call Continuity
11.1. VCC network architecture
11.2. Registration and call operations
11.3. Domain selection
11.4. Domain transfer
12. Security in MMD/IMS
12.1. MMD security architecture
12.2. Role of IPSec and TLS
12.3. Firewall & NAT traversal
71
1x & 1xEV-DO
Self-paced eLearning
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
1
x

&
1
x
E
V
-
D
O
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Overview of CDMA2000 Networks
This course describes the IS-95 network architecture and the new CDMA2000 network nodes. It explains the
CDMA2000 air interface, its channels, and how it supports packet data services and increases the user capacity. This
course also discusses the user mobility in radio and packet data networks. IS-95 interoperability and deployment
scenarios are covered at length. Finally, it looks at the evolution alternatives for CDMA2000 systems.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Describe the history of CDMA2000 and the motivation
behind designing CDMA2000 standards
x Describe the limitations of existing IS-95 networks
x Describe the CDMA2000 network architecture with a focus
on packet data networks
x Explain the key goals of CDMA2000 air interface
x Define the key features of the 1x air interface option
x Identify interoperability issues between IS-95 networks and
CDMA2000 networks
x Explain the current deployment situation of CDMA2000
networks
x Depict the evolution strategy from IS-95 to CDMA2000
x Describe the evolution from CDMA2000 to next generation
technologies
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a detailed understanding
of the basics of the CDMA2000 network. This includes those in a
design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering, network
engineering, or verification role.
Suggested Prerequisites
x None
Complementary Courses
x Overview of 3G Wireless Networks (eLearning)
Average Course Length
3 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
Motivation for CDMA2000
x Characteristics of 3G networks
x Limitations of IS-95 networks
x Requirements to remove these limitations
x CDMA2000 key goals
IS-95 Architecture
x Overview of IS-95
x Architecture of IS-95 networks
x Key features and data rates of the IS-95
air interface
CDMA2000 Architecture
x Introduction to the architecture of
CDMA2000 networks
x New packet data components of the
CDMA2000 network
Overview of CDMA2000 Air Interface
x Key features of the CDMA2000 air
interface
x CDMA2000 capacity enhancement
features
CDMA2000 Mobility
x Radio network mobility procedures
x Packet core network mobility procedures
Evolution from IS-95 to CDMA2000
Networks
x Deployment issues of a CDMA2000
network
x Interoperability issues between IS-95 and
CDMA2000 networks
x Future evolutionary steps of CDMA2000
Summary
Put It All Together
x Assess the knowledge of the
participant based on the objectives of
the course
72
1x & 1xEV-DO
Self-paced eLearning
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
1
x

&
1
x
E
V
-
D
O
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
CDMA2000 Air Interface
CDMA2000 is the next step in the evolution of the widely deployed IS-95 network. It is one of the technologies in
3
rd
generation wireless networks. Standardized by 3GPP2, CDMA2000 has introduced a new air interface that offers
new features to support new services. In addition, the CDMA2000 air interface is designed to maintain backward
compatibility with IS-95 networks. The key enhancements in the CDMA2000 air interface are increased capacity
over the air interface and support for packet data services. This course provides an overview of the new CDMA2000
air interface. It details the features added to support packet data and how CDMA2000 offers increased capacity
compared to IS-95 networks. The key question for the CDMA2000 operators is how CDMA2000 networks can
coexist with IS-95 networks. This course clearly explains how CDMA2000 maintains backward compatibility with
IS-95 networks. Finally, end-to-end service scenarios are presented to show how new services are enabled in
CDMA2000.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Define the 3G radio interface requirements and evolution
strategy of IS-95
x Identify the CDMA2000 radio interfaces and related
protocols
x List the key differences and similarities between IS-95 and
IS-2000 systems
x Describe the packet data characteristics and how the always
connected paradigm of a packet data call is supported over
the air interface
x Identify the enhancements that result in improved system
capacity and mobile standby time
x Explain interoperability with IS-95 systems
x Step through the life of a packet data call
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a detailed understanding
of the enhancements of the CDMA2000 air interface. This
includes those in a design, test, systems engineering, sales
engineering, network engineering or verification role.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Overview of CDMA2000 Networks (eLearning)
Complementary Courses
x Overview of 3G Wireless Networks (eLearning)
x CDMA2000 Packet Data Networks (eLearning)
Average Course Length
3 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
IS-95 Evolution to 3G
x Requirements for support of higher data
rates
x CDMA2000 evolution paths
CDMA2000 Radio Architecture
x Overview of the CDMA2000 architecture
x Key functions of the air interface
Key Functions of CDMA Systems
x CDMA2000 spectrum used
Enhancements for Packet Data
x CDMA2000 supported data rates
x Bandwidth on Demand requirements on
the supplemental channels
x Differences between sessions and
connections
x Packet data enhancements
CDMA2000 Air Interface Enhancements
x Quick paging channel
x Access operations enhancements
x Capacity enhanced using fast forward
power control
Concurrent Services and QoS
x Requirements to support simultaneous
voice calls and data calls
x QoS mechanisms in CDMA2000
Interoperability with IS-95
x Requirements for interoperability
between CDMA2000 and IS-95
End-to-End Call Scenario
x Packet data call establishment example
Summary
Put It All Together
x Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course
73
1x & 1xEV-DO
Self-paced eLearning
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
1
x

&
1
x
E
V
-
D
O
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
CDMA2000 Packet Data Networks
The CDMA2000 packet data network is one of the major enhancements made to IS-95-based CDMA networks.
These networks are designed to provide efficient wireless Internet services. CDMA2000 is based on IETF standards
such as Mobile IP, RADIUS and L2TP. Service providers have begun to equip their networks with CDMA2000
packet data networking capability. This course offers a detailed understanding of CDMA2000 network components,
protocols and services. It is a must for both operators and equipment manufacturers to understand issues in design
and deployment of CDMA2000 packet data services. This course focuses mainly on Simple IP service since it will
be the first service to be deployed. Another important aspect discussed in this course is accounting; packet data
accounting is one of the least understood subjects in the wireless Internet world. This course explains how
accounting for packet data services works in CDMA2000 networks. By way of example, there is a discussion of
some useful services such as Virtual Private Networks and Instant Messaging.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Sketch the CDMA2000 packet data network architecture
x Describe the detailed functionality of PDSN/FA, AAA and
HA
x Define the network services provided by CDMA2000
x Study the open R-P interface and details of R-P sessions
x Describe Simple IP service in detail including session setup,
handoffs and roaming
x Define the always connected paradigm and how it is
supported in CDMA2000
x Outline the packet data states
x Sketch the accounting architecture in CDMA2000 packet
data networks and related protocols
x Describe the details of CDMA2000 packet data networks
with a few service examples
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a detailed understanding
of the CDMA2000 packet data network. This includes those in a
design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering, network
engineering, or verification role.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Overview of CDMA2000 Networks (eLearning)
Complementary Courses
x Mobile IP for CDMA2000 (eLearning)
Average Course Length
3 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
CDMA2000 Network Refresher
x Overview of the CDMA2000 architecture
CDMA2000 Packet Data Network
Architecture
x CDMA2000 packet data network
components
x CDMA2000 network services
x Function of Simple IP and Mobile IP
CDMA2000 Packet Data Network Protocols
and Interfaces
x Characteristics of the IOS and R-P
interfaces
x Relationship between the IS-2000 air
interface and CDMA2000 packet data
services
Simple IP Services
x Simple IP session establishment
x Differences between dynamic IP
addresses and permanent IP addresses
Packet Data States
x Requirements of the Always Connected
paradigm
x Packet data states
Mobility and Roaming
x Packet zones and dormant handoffs
x Roaming support during a packet data
session
Accounting for Packet Data Services
x The AAA accounting model
x Accounting records in the CDMA2000
network
Service Examples
x VPN service establishment example
x Instant Messaging application example
Summary
Put It All Together
x Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course
74
1x & 1xEV-DO
Self-paced eLearning
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
1
x

&
1
x
E
V
-
D
O
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Mobile IP for CDMA2000
Mobility is one of the most important aspects of wireless networks. The mobility technologies for voice and packet
data services are completely different. Mobile IP is the technology chosen to provide packet data mobility in
CDMA2000 networks. Defined by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF), Mobile IP is a Layer 3 mobility
technology that works in both wireline and wireless networks. This course focuses on the Mobile IP implementation
in CDMA2000 packet data networks. It provides a detailed understanding of the Mobile IP protocol, its features and
how it can be used to provide seamless mobility for packet data services in CDMA2000 networks. An engaging
service scenario is used to take students through the entire process of a Mobile IP session setup. While Mobile IP is
a mobility technology, it is extended to support services such as VPN. The course covers the services aspects of
Mobile IP in greater detail. In addition, changes made to Mobile IP to implement it in CDMA2000 networks are
covered.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Explain why Mobile IP was chosen for CDMA2000 packet
data networks
x Define the concept of IP Mobility
x Describe Mobile IP as defined by the IETF
x Specify how Mobile IP is implemented in CDMA2000
packet data networks
x Describe the Mobile IP session setup process in CDMA2000
packet data networks
x Define the changes required to various components to
support Mobile IP versus Simple IP
x Recognize the changes made to Mobile IP in CDMA2000
packet data networks
x Walk through the Mobile IP authentication process
x Explain how services such as VPN are supported using
Mobile IP
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a detailed understanding
of the CDMA2000 packet data networks use of Mobile IP. This
includes those in a design, test, systems engineering, sales
engineering, network engineering, or verification role.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Overview of CDMA2000 Networks (eLearning)
x CDMA2000 Packet Data Networks (eLearning)
Complementary Courses
x Overview of 3G Wireless Networks (eLearning)
Average Course Length
3 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
CDMA2000 Packet Data Architecture
x Architecture of the CDMA2000 packet
data network
x CDMA2000 protocols and interfaces
IP Mobility
x Types of mobility in a wireless network
x IP Mobility requirements
x IP Mobility technologies
Mobile IP in the Internet
x Necessity of Mobile IP in the Internet
x Components required for Mobile IP
x Functions of Mobile IP
x Mobile IP and the care-of-address
Mobile IP in CDMA2000 Networks
x Mobile IP implementation in CDMA2000
networks
x Required changes made to Mobile IP for
CDMA2000
Mobile IP Special Features in CDMA2000
x Dynamic home address
x Mobile IP authentication
x CDMA2000 VPN setup using reverse
tunneling
Deploying Mobile IP
x Mobile IP enhancements required in
PDSN
x Mobile IP relay and network options
Summary
Put It All Together
x Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course
75
1x & 1xEV-DO
Self-paced eLearning
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
1
x

&
1
x
E
V
-
D
O
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
1xEV-DO Networks
CDMA2000 networks have been deployed in many parts of the world. While these networks provide a higher voice
capacity and support for packet data networks, they do not meet the IMT-2000 requirements for 2 Mbps data rates.
1xEV-DO represents the next step in the evolution of CDMA2000 systems. 1xEV-DO is expected to provide
forward link data rates in excess of 2 Mbps and support of non-real-time packet data services. This course introduces
the 1xEV-DO technology. Specifically, over the air interface aspects are explained to show how 1xEV-DO can
achieve a 2 Mbps bandwidth. In addition, the 1xEV-DO network architecture is covered. Since 1xEV-DO is
expected to be deployed as an overlay to CDMA2000 networks, most service providers will want to know how
1xEV-DO systems will interoperate with CDMA2000 networks. This course addresses those questions, and
concludes with a discussion of air interface protocols, channel structure and network interfaces.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Discuss the relationship between 1xEV-DO and CDMA2000
x Define important features of 1xEV-DO such as air interface,
peak data rates and average data rates
x Discuss how 1xEV-DO is able to achieve higher data rates
x Explain 1xEV-DO air interface details including the protocol
layering
x Highlight the forward link and reverse link features in 1xEV-
DO
x List requirements for handsets and networks to achieve
interoperability with CDMA2000
x Describe interoperability configurations
x Examine how user originated session setup occurs in an
1xEV-DO system
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a detailed understanding
of the evolution of the CDMA2000 network to 1xEV-DO. This
includes those in a design, test, systems engineering, sales
engineering, network engineering, or verification role.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Overview of CDMA2000 Networks (eLearning)
x CDMA2000 Air Interface (eLearning)
Complementary Courses
x Overview of 3G Wireless Networks (eLearning)
Average Course Length
3 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
1xEV-DO Introduction
x Introduction to 1xEV-DO
x Motivation for 1xEV-DO
x 1xEV-DO standards
x 1xEV-DO data rates in forward and
reverse directions
x How are higher data rates achieved in
1xEV-DV?
1xEV-DO Architecture
x Overview of the 1xEV-DO architecture
x New 1xEV-DO components and
interfaces
1xEV-DO Air Interface
x 1xEV-DO air interface functions and
capabilities
x Rational for data rate increases in 1xEV-
DO
1xEV-DO Forward Link Details
x 1xEV-DO forward link channel structure
x Important forward link features
1xEV-DO Reverse Link Details
x 1xEV-DO reverse link channel structure
x Important reverse link features
Interoperability with CDMA2000
x Handset requirements for CDMA2000
interoperability
x Network requirements for CDMA2000
interoperability
Call Flows
x Mobile data session origination using
simple IP
Summary
Put It All Together
x Assess the knowledge of the
participant based on the objectives of
the course
76
1x & 1xEV-DO
Self-paced eLearning
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
1
x

&
1
x
E
V
-
D
O
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
1xEV-DO Networks (Rev A)
Wireless service providers in many parts of the world are rapidly deploying networks based on 1xEV-DO (Rev 0) to
support high speed packet data services. On the forward link, Rev 0 provides speeds rivaling DSL or cable modem
Internet access. In the reverse direction, however, the speeds are much slower, comparable to CDMA2000 1x. Rev
A of 1xEV-DO significantly enhances the reverse link to support data rates almost ten times faster than Rev 0. With
these data rates, sending a 3 megapixel picture from your new mobile phone just became more palatable! In
addition to improving the reverse link data rates, Rev A seeks to better support real-time services like Voice over IP
(VoIP) and streaming video. 1xEV-DO (Rev 0) does not support traditional voice services; Rev A, by supporting
VoIP, overcomes this liability and makes a play as a one-stop shop for voice and data. With Awards celebrated
approach to crystallizing difficult concepts, this course clearly explains key differences between Rev 0 and Rev A
for those already familiar with Rev 0.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Describe the limitations and issues in 1xEV-DO (Rev 0)
x Define important features of 1xEV-DO (Rev A) including
peak data rates, new channels and multi-user packets
x Discuss the changes to Data Rate Control (DRC) processing
at the mobile and the base station
x Describe how Rev A supports real time services with
enhancements such as small packet size support and multi-
user packets
x Analyze the performance enhancement changes in Rev A
such as DRC Offset and Data Source Control (DSC)
x Describe the reverse link load management approach using
Traffic-to-Pilot (T2P) power ratios
x Illustrate the reverse link data rate enhancements to support
1.85 Mbps
x Explain enhancements to interoperability between 1x &
1xEV-DO networks
x Walk though an end-to-end call flow
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those with knowledge of 1xEV-DO
Rev 0 who are seeking an understanding of the Rev A changes
and enhancements. This includes those in design, test, systems
engineering, sales engineering, network engineering, RF
deployment engineering, field engineering and operations roles.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Overview of CDMA2000 Networks (eLearning)
x CDMA2000 Air Interface (eLearning)
x 1xEV-DO Networks (eLearning)
Average Course Length
3 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
1xEV-DO (Rev 0) Review
x Architecture
x Forward link operations
x Reverse link operations
Rev A Changes and Enhancements
x Motivation
x Rev A new features
x Rev A forward and reverse link channels
Rev A Forward Link Operations
x Rev 0 Limitations
x Data Rate Control (DRC) changes
x Multi-user packet support
x Additional MAC index values
x DRC and Multi-user packets
x Performance functions: DRC Lock, DRC
Offset and data source control
Rev A Reverse Link Details
x Rev 0 limitations
x Reverse link subtypes
x Data Rate selection
x Auxiliary pilot usage
x Hybrid ARQ on reverse link
Interoperability
x Circuit notification for 1x interoperability
End-to-End Call Flow
x Example end-to-end call flow
Summary
Put It All Together
x Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course
77
1x & 1xEV-DO
Self-paced eLearning
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
1
x

&
1
x
E
V
-
D
O
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Overview of MMD (IMS) in 1x/1xEV-DO
Networks
The Multimedia Domain (MMD) is a significant CDMA core network evolution that emphasizes service delivery.
MMD provides a network that fulfills the promise of 3G, allowing a combination of real-time and non- real-time
services to be delivered to a single device. MMD is access network independent and, hence, promotes
interoperability between wireline, cellular, WLAN and other network types. This course provides an overview of the
IP-based next generation multimedia networks for CDMA2000-based wireless networks. It explores the various
concepts used in an IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) including architecture, network components and interfaces. It
also gives the student an understanding of the enabling technologies such as SIP, SDP, MEGACO and DIAMETER,
and the use of these technologies within the IP Multimedia architecture. The IP Multimedia call model, call control
protocols, signaling and end-to-end message flow are also covered.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x List the driving forces, requirements and goals of the
Multimedia Domain (MMD) in CDMA2000 networks
x Identify the building blocks used to construct the MMD
x Describe the functions of the MMD architecture that support
multimedia functions
x Explain the roles of SIP, MEGACO, DIAMETER, and the
enabling technologies used in the architecture
x Describe how functions such as mobility, roaming and call
processing are carried out in the new architecture
x Explain end-to-end service establishment flows in the IP
architecture
x Describe scenarios that illustrate interworking with the PSTN
and legacy wireless networks
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a high level
understanding of the Multimedia Domain (MMD) and IP
Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) in 1x/1xEV-DO networks. This
includes those in sales and marketing, product planning, product
management, design, integration, verification and deployment.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Overview of CDMA2000 Networks (eLearning)
x 1xEV-DO Networks (eLearning)
Average Course Length
3 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
Motivation for MMD
x Circuit and packet domains of wireless
networks
x Key goals for the multimedia domain
x IMS service examples
MMD Architecture
x Architecture reference model
x Components and functions
x Interfaces and protocols
x Addressing in MMD
x Traffic and Signaling
Overview of Relevant Protocols
x Role of SIP and SDP
x MGCP and MEGACO
x Use of SIP and MEGACO in MMD
x Role of DIAMETER
MMD in 1x/DO Networks
x MMD/IMS in 1x/1xEV-DO networks
x IMS service triggers
MMD Call Scenarios
x Registration
x Call origination and termination
x Roaming and Handoffs
Interworking
x Interoperability between PSTN and IMS
x Interoperability with legacy wireless
networks
Summary
Put It All Together
x Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course
expert
become
an
by training with those who already are
78
by training with those who already are
expert
become
an
expert
become
an
G
S
M

&
G
P
R
S
/
E
D
G
E
GSM & GPRS/EDGE
GSM (Global System for Mobile Communica-
tions) has been a worldwide standard for many
years. The GSM community has now deployed
GPRS (General Packet Radio Service) for the
launch of packet data. The evolution to GPRS
will allow players from many sectors to deliver
new communications services, characterized by
mobility and Internet services.
About the Curriculum
Award Solutions GSM and GPRS/EDGE cur-
riculum presents a suite of courses that is
appropriate for all audiences seeking GSM
and GPRS/EDGE knowledge - from the execu-
tive who wants a quick overview to an access
designer or a core network developer requiring
the details of the messages, the parameters
and the rationale for the current standards.
Instructor led Courses
Exploring GSM
GSM Performance Workshop
AMR Performance Workshop
Exploring GPRS and EDGE
Mastering GPRS and EDGE
GPRS and EDGE Performance
Workshop
Wireless Internet - From IP to
EDGE & UMTS/HSPA
Self-paced eLearning
Courses
Overview of GPRS
GPRS Air Interface
GPRS Packet Data Operations
GPRS Mobility
Exploring GPRS and EDGE Instructor led course
GPRS Air Interface eLearning Course
79
80
GSM & GPRS/EDGE
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
G
S
M

&
G
P
R
S
/
E
D
G
E
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Exploring GSM
A strong understanding of GSM technology and networks is helpful for anyone working in GSM or related (i.e.,
GPRS, EDGE and UMTS) areas. Exploring GSM provides this foundation by introducing GSM and explaining the
history and unique qualities that established GSM as the leading global standard for wireless communications. This
course is presented at a level suitable for individuals comfortable with basic wireless concepts who want to gain
familiarity with all aspects of a GSM network. Radio physical layer concepts can be presented at either a high level
or in detail for individuals with a more technical background. This course addresses the major interfaces for
messaging in the GSM network, and shows how network nodes coordinate mobility and call setup. The student will
gain a good understanding of services commonly deployed in a GSM network. This course is completed with a view
of GPRS and UMTS with an understanding of the GSM components in a UMTS network.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x List the basic concepts related to GSM networks
x Sketch the GSM network architecture and its components,
including the Mobile, BTS, BSC, MSC, VLR, HLR, EIR,
SM-SC, and CSE
x Describe the channel structure of GSM and list the logical
channels of GSM
x Describe how user mobility is supported in GSM networks
x Identify and describe various signaling protocols used in
GSM networks
x Step through various scenarios such as call delivery, security,
and handover
x Walk through an end-to-end call in GSM networks
x Describe the evolution strategy for GSM operators
Intended Audience
This overview course is primarily intended for anyone who needs
familiarity with GSM-based networks such as those in planning,
design, deployment, network engineering, product support and
operations.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Wireless Technologies and Networks Overview
(Instructor led)
Suggested Follow-up Training
x Exploring GPRS and EDGE (Instructor led)
x Exploring UMTS (WCDMA) (Instructor led)
Course Length
2 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Introduction
1.1. History of wireless communications
1.2. Motivation for GSM
1.3. Current GSM status
1.4. Key characteristics of a GSM network
2. GSM Network Architecture
2.1. Overview of network components
2.2. Mobile Station
2.3. BSS (BTS/BSC)
2.4. Cell site configuration
2.5. MSC/VLR and HLR
2.6. SM-SC
3. GSM Radio/Physical Layer
3.1. Concept of radio channels
3.2. Time Slots, Frames, and Multiple
Access
3.3. System Acquisition
3.4. Access and idle mode procedures
3.5. Traffic channel operations
4. GSM Signaling
4.1. Basics of SS7
4.2. GSM SS7 nodes
4.3. BSSAP (DTAP/BSSMAP)
4.4. SCCP
4.5. TCAP & MAP
4.6. ISUP
5. GSM Network Mobility and Call Processing
5.1. Attach and location update process
5.2. Mobile Calls
5.3. Handover
5.4. Security in GSM
6. GSM Services
6.1. Teleservices
6.2. Bearer services
6.3. Supplementary services
6.4. Short message
6.5. CAMEL and location services
7. Evolution of GSM EGPRS & UMTS
7.1. GPRS/EDGE
7.2. UMTS
81
GSM & GPRS/EDGE
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
G
S
M

&
G
P
R
S
/
E
D
G
E
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
GSM Performance Workshop
As wireless service providers continue their deployment of GSM networks, one of the key concerns is how to
manage and monitor the performance of these networks. This unique workshop prepares students to use the tools at
their disposal to manage the performance of their GSM network. Modern GSM network equipment offers a wide
array of performance features such as RF Frequency Hopping and the Adaptive Multi-Rate (AMR) speech codec.
When properly tuned, these features provide very high quality voice services and high spectral efficiency in GSM
networks. To achieve optimal performance, network operators must know how to collect the right set of
performance measurements, interpret those measurements, and adjust network parameters when improvements are
needed. Students will learn to use the performance counters provided by their network equipment coupled with
statistics and tracing capabilities of their drive test tools to measure network performance. The adjustable network
parameters and optional features are explained as well as how these affect each aspect of voice performance.
Concepts are reinforced through hands-on exercises that show the impact of these parameter changes.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Describe the basic GSM operations and the configurable
parameters that control them
x Discuss the effects of the major GSM performance enhancing
features and understand when each feature should be used
x Select the key GSM network performance counters to
monitor and understand how to interpret them
x Show how GSM control channels and traffic channels should
be dimensioned to ensure service availability
x Describe how frequency hopping can be used with fractional
loading to provide very high spectral efficiency
x Examine the AMR speech codec and see how it can be
applied to dramatically increase network quality and capacity
x Explain the impact of supporting GSM at 850 MHz and 1900
MHz in the same cell
x Analyze the performance features, counters and parameters
of your network equipment
Intended Audience
This course is intended for a technical audience, primarily those
in RF engineering, RF performance, system performance, RF
design or planning organizations.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Exploring GSM (Instructor led)
Suggested Follow-up Training
x GPRS and EDGE Performance Workshop (Instructor led)
Course Length
3 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Optimizing GSM Networks
1.1. Rationale for performance analysis
1.2. Optimization process
2. Review of GSM Principles
2.1. Introduction to GSM
2.2. GSM network architecture
2.3. GSM channel structure
3. Cell Selection and Idle Mode
3.1. BCCH parameters
3.2. Initial cell selection and finding the
right network
3.3. Cell re-selection
3.4. Camping on a cell
3.5. Paging parameters
4. Mobility Management and Call Setup
4.1. Network access and the RACH
4.2. Signaling and the SDCCH
4.3. Control channel and traffic channel
assignment
4.4. Location updates procedure
4.5. Call origination procedures
4.6. SMS
5. GSM Frequency Planning
5.1. BCCH frequency planning
5.2. Frequency hopping parameters
5.3. Frequency hopping and fractional
loading
5.4. Overlay/Underlay considerations
5.5. Dual Band considerations
6. Dimensioning GSM Channels
6.1. Erlang-B and blocking
6.2. CCCH provisioning
6.3. SDCCH provisioning
6.4. Traffic channel provisioning
6.5. Beacon and hopping layer provisioning
7. Dedicated Mode Performance
7.1. Role of the SACCH
7.2. Measurement reporting
7.3. Handover scenarios and criteria
7.4. Power control
7.5. Discontinuous transmission parameters
and procedures
8. AMR
8.1. Mean opinion scores and AMR
8.2. Speech codecs and AMR
8.3. Key parameters and statistics of AMR
82
GSM & GPRS/EDGE
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
G
S
M

&
G
P
R
S
/
E
D
G
E
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
AMR Performance Workshop
The Adaptive Multi-Rate (AMR) speech codec has been introduced in GSM standards and is now available in many
GSM network products and devices. The AMR codec has the potential to significantly improve call quality, network
capacity and coverage. Achieving maximum benefits from AMR requires a solid understanding of the key concepts
and operational aspects. This course provides that understanding by first reviewing the fundamental concepts behind
AMR, including vocoders, forward error correction and link adaptation. Next, the AMR standard is presented,
including the codec modes, channel modes and tunable parameters. This course concludes by discussing the use of
network statistics and drive test tools to measure and optimize AMR performance. After taking this course, the
student will understand AMR devices, network products as well as test tools, and understand how to employ them to
deliver the maximum benefit.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Discuss different ways to assess call quality in a GSM
network, including BER, FER and MOS
x Explain how poor quality calls are automatically released in a
GSM network
x Describe the tradeoff between codec bit rate and speech
quality
x Describe the AMR codec modes and the inherent
performance of each
x Explain the effects of forward error correction on speech
quality
x Discuss the concept of link adaptation and how it is
employed in AMR
x List the tunable AMR network parameters including: codec
mode, channel mode, thresholds and hysteresis
x Explain how AMR can be used to improve call quality in
poor coverage areas
x Describe how AMR increases capacity for a given number of
radios in a site using Half Rate channels
x Explain how AMR increases capacity through increased
fractional load
x Describe how network statistics and drive test tools can be
employed to optimize AMR performance
Intended Audience
This course is intended for a technical audience, primarily those
in RF design, engineering and performance organizations.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Exploring GSM (Instructor led)
Course Length
1 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. An Introduction to GSM Speech Coding
1.1. Full rate and half rate TCHs
1.2. Speech production model
1.3. General vocoder model
1.4. GSM vocoders: FR, HR, and EFR
2. Call Quality and Dropped Calls
2.1. BER and FER
2.2. Mean opinion scores
2.3. Radio link timeout
3. AMR Fundamentals
3.1. Lossy compression
3.2. Forward error correction
3.3. Link adaptation
3.4. Codec modes
3.5. Channel modes
3.6. Thresholds and hysteresis
3.7. Handover between HR and FR
4. Improving Quality with AMR-FR
4.1. Optimization process for AMR
4.2. Creating a baseline for EFR
4.3. Codec mode parameters settings
4.4. Analyzing performance: RXQUAL,
FER and MOS
4.5. Radio link timeout tuning
4.6. Power control issues
4.7. Example drive test results
4.8. Example network statistics
5. Increasing Capacity with AMR-HR
5.1. AMR-HR code mode parameters
5.2. FR-HR handover parameters
5.3. Example RXQUAL, FER and MOS
5.4. Analyzing capacity gains
5.5. HR and FR distributions
5.6. Example drive test results
5.7. Example network statistics
83
GSM & GPRS/EDGE
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
G
S
M

&
G
P
R
S
/
E
D
G
E
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Exploring GPRS and EDGE
This course provides an overview of two important technologies: General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) and
Enhanced Data Rates for Global Evolution (EDGE). These technologies are essential for providing a cost effective
network solution to enable the wireless web. This course covers the network architecture, components and basic
operations of GPRS/EDGE networks. It also provides an understanding of the various types of handsets and their
capabilities. The radio network is explored, including the features designed to efficiently use the limited radio
spectrum. In addition, this course explores the way limited radio resources are shared among numerous users. The
core network is discussed in detail, including an investigation of the IP mobility solution, plus a quick look at the
various interface protocols. By the conclusion of the course, the student will have a good understanding how
existing networks will evolve to support packet data services.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Identify the needs for GSM evolution to GPRS/EDGE
x List the capabilities and limitations of GPRS and EDGE
x Step through the process of upgrading the GSM network to
support GPRS/EDGE
x Sketch the network architecture of GPRS/EDGE
x Identify the enhancements required in air interface to achieve
higher data rates of GPRS/EDGE
x Describe mechanisms of sharing resources (slots) among
GPRS/EDGE users
x Step through the mobility scenarios of GPRS/EDGE
Intended Audience
This course is intended for individuals seeking an overview of the
GPRS and EDGE technologies and capabilities. The discussion of
GPRS and EDGE is at a high level which makes it suitable for
personnel in management, network planning, deployment and
operations.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Exploring GSM (Instructor led)
Suggested Follow-up Training
x Exploring UMTS (WCDMA) (Instructor led)
Course Length
2 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Introduction
1.1. Motivation for GPRS and EDGE
1.2. Efficient use of radio resources
1.3. Evolution from existing networks
1.4. Supported data rates
1.5. 3G technology landscape
2. Network Architecture
2.1. Network overview
2.2. Different classes of GPRS handsets
2.3. Role of the GGSN and SGSN
2.4. Evolution from GSM networks
2.5. Protocol reference models
3. GPRS and EDGE Radio Network
3.1. Physical layer operations
3.2. Error protection techniques
3.3. GMSK & 8PSK modulation
3.4. MCS & CS classes
3.5. Physical and logical channels
4. Managing Radio Resources
4.1. MAC - channel coordination (TBF,
medium access modes)
4.2. RLC - Modes of operation
5. Gb Interface
5.1. BSSGP virtual circuits
5.2. Frame relay
6. GPRS Packet Network
6.1. GPRS Attach
6.2. PDP Context Activation
6.3. Interface from SGSN to GGSN
7. GPRS Services
7.1. Service APN
7.2. Connecting to external networks
8. GPRS Mobility & Roaming
8.1. Cell update procedures
8.2. RA update
8.3. GPRS Roaming Exchange (GRX)
9. Evolution to UMTS (WCDMA)
9.1. Highlights of the technology
9.2. Migration path
84
GSM & GPRS/EDGE
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
G
S
M

&
G
P
R
S
/
E
D
G
E
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Mastering GPRS and EDGE
General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) and Enhanced Data Rates for Global Evolution (EDGE) provide a cost-
effective packet data solution for GSM wireless operators and users. This course presents a technical overview of
these two important technologies. The network architecture, components, and basic operations of GPRS/EDGE
networks are discussed in detail. The radio network features designed to make efficient use of the limited radio
spectrum are explored. The core network and how it evolves from a GSM network is discussed in detail. This
includes an investigation of the IP mobility solution within GPRS. Interface protocols such as Session Management
(SM), GPRS Mobility Management (GMM), Medium Access Control (MAC) and Radio Link Control (RLC) are
examined. An end-to-end scenario demonstrates how these protocols interact. The course concludes with a look at
the future of GPRS/EDGE and how it will evolve toward UMTS.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x List the capabilities and limitations of GPRS and EDGE
x Sketch the network architecture and identify the air interface
protocol enhancements of GPRS/EDGE
x Elaborate the adaptive coding and modulation and
incremental redundancy of GPRS/EDGE
x Describe mechanisms of sharing resources (slots) among
GPRS/EDGE users using MAC/RLC protocols
x Step through the mobility scenarios of GPRS/EDGE
x Specify the needs of interface protocols such as GMM/SM,
SNDCP and LLC
x Step through a packet data session from a mobile
Intended Audience
This course is designed for individuals seeking an in-depth
understanding of the GPRS and EDGE technologies and
capabilities. The discussion of GPRS and EDGE is at a system
level which makes it suitable for designers, system engineers and
network planners.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Exploring GSM (Instructor led)
Suggested Follow-up Training
x Mastering UMTS Radio Networks and Signaling (R99)
(Instructor led)
Course Length
3 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Introduction
1.1. Motivation for GPRS and EDGE
1.2. Capabilities and limitations of GPRS
and EDGE
2. Network Architecture
2.1. Network and protocol reference model
2.2. GPRS/EDGE handset capabilities
2.3. Role of the GGSN and SGSN
2.4. GPRS basic operations
3. GPRS and EDGE Radio Network
3.1. Physical layer operations
3.2. Error protection techniques
3.3. GMSK & 8PSK modulation
3.4. MCS & CS classes
3.5. Physical and logical channels
4. Managing Radio Resources
4.1. MAC - channel coordination (TBF,
medium access modes)
4.2. RLC - Modes of operation
4.3. Incremental Redundancy (IR) in EDGE
5. Packet Data Review
5.1. Internet Routing Protocols
5.2. Role of IP, TCP and UDP
6. Gb (BSS-SGSN) Interface
6.1. BSSGP virtual circuits
6.2. Frame relay
7. GPRS Packet Network
7.1. GPRS Attach
7.2. PDP context activation
7.3. Interface from SGSN to GGSN
7.4. Encapsulation and tunneling (GTP)
8. Services in GPRS/EDGE Networks
8.1. Enterprise and VPN Applications
8.2. Service APN
8.3. Transparent and Non-Transparent
Access
9. GPRS Mobility and Roaming
9.1. Cell Update and Routing Area Update
9.2. Global roaming and GRX
10. GPRS Billing
10.1. CGF and billing coordination
11. End-to-end Scenarios
11.1. Concurrent GSM and GPRS services
12. Evolution to UMTS
85
GSM & GPRS/EDGE
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
G
S
M

&
G
P
R
S
/
E
D
G
E
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
GPRS and EDGE Performance Workshop
This unique course prepares participants to use available tools to manage the performance of their GPRS networks.
GPRS and EDGE network equipment offers a wide array of performance features such as on-demand allocation of
GPRS/EDGE channels. When properly used, these features provide a very high quality data services network.
However, to achieve optimal performance, network operators must know how to collect the right set of performance
measurements, interpret those measurements, and adjust network parameters when improvements are needed.
Students learn to use the performance counters provided by their network equipment coupled with statistics and
tracing capabilities of their drive test tools to measure network performance. This course begins with a discussion of
the Internet and GPRS fundamentals. It then explains the network statistics, configurable network parameters as well
as optional features, and shows how these affect each aspect of data performance. The concepts are reinforced with
hands-on exercises that show the impact of these parameter changes. Where possible, the course is conducted on-site
in a workshop format, using network statistics and drive test results from the students own live network.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Discuss the key differences associated with supporting IP
based services in comparison to voice services
x Describe the configuration parameters available and their
impact on GPRS and EDGE network operations
x Interpret key GPRS and EDGE network performance
measurements
x Explain the impact GPRS and EDGE have on GSM control
channels and voice traffic channels
x Describe how to dimension the dedicated and on-demand
GPRS and EDGE channels (PDCH)
x Explain how to engineer and dimension the Abis link
between the BSC and the BTS to support E-GPRS channels
x Measure the latency and average throughput in your network
and learn the impact on the subscribers application
x Discuss the intricacies of setting up a Packet Data Session
x Describe how to isolate failures and successfully troubleshoot
problems
x Realize the impact EDGE (E-GPRS) has on the performance
of a GSM/GPRS network
x Describe the advanced E-GPRS features including
Incremental Redundancy (IR) and Link Adaptation
Intended Audience
This course is intended for a technical audience, primarily those
in RF design, engineering and performance organizations.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Exploring GSM (Instructor led)
x Exploring GPRS and EDGE (Instructor led)
Course Length
3 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Optimizing Wireless Data Networks
1.1. Performance analysis process and tools
2. Review of GPRS Principles
2.1. Network architecture
2.2. Basic operations
2.3. Usage scenarios
3. Internet Essentials
3.1. Addressing
3.2. Basic protocols: IP, TCP, UDP, DNS
3.3. IP routing principles
3.4. End-to-end example of packet routing
3.5. Security and VPNs
4. Cell Selection, Mobility and Establishing
Sessions
4.1. Cell selection and reselection
4.2. Attach, routing area update and PDP
contexts
4.3. Mobile message traces
4.4. Configurable parameters
4.5. SGSN statistics
5. TBF Setup and Retransmission
5.1. TBF establishment
5.2. Impact of retransmissions on throughput
5.3. BSS Statistics
6. Radio Link Performance
6.1. Power control
6.2. Measurements
6.3. Link adaptation
6.4. Incremental redundancy
6.5. Mobile message traces
6.6. Adjustable parameters
6.7. Network statistics
7. Application Performance on GPRS and EDGE
7.1. WAP, Web and VPN
7.2. TCP performance of GPRS and EDGE
networks
8. Dimensioning GPRS and EDGE Channels
8.1. Fixed vs. On-demand PDCHs
8.2. Dimensioning (PDCHs)
8.3. Dimensioning the A-bis for E-GPRS
8.4. Determine the impact to voice traffic
9. Future GPRS and EDGE Improvements
9.1. Gs interface
9.2. Separate packet control channels
86
GSM & GPRS/EDGE
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
G
S
M

&
G
P
R
S
/
E
D
G
E
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Wireless Internet - From IP to EDGE &
UMTS/HSPA
A successful sales and marketing campaign for wireless Internet over 3G networks is key to the success of 3G data
services. Therefore, sales and marketing groups need a good conceptual understanding of GPRS/EDGE, UMTS, IP
and the Internet, as well as the benefits, limitations and competitive positioning of applications technologies. After
taking this course, the student will be able to: (a) understand the needs of the end consumer and corporate users, (b)
help develop appropriate solutions for corporate client needs, (c) effectively communicate with IT managers using
IT terminology, (d) discuss the network architecture and operations of GPRS/EDGE, UMTS and IP networks, (e)
help customers develop solutions to migrate legacy devices and application to GPRS/EDGE networks, (f) assess the
impact of the evolution of GPRS/EDGE to UMTS/HSPA (WCDMA) technologies, and (g) develop appropriate
competitive technical positioning.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Describe how GPRS/EDGE, UMTS, LAN, WLAN, PAN,
PSTN and the Internet come together to provide 3G data
services
x Define the terminology of GPRS/EDGE, UMTS and
enterprise IP networks
x Describe the role of IP and TCP/UDP in the Internet
x Detail how IP packets are exchanged between the mobile
user and the Internet
x Explain Internet functions such as Firewalls and the DNS
x Describe the features of GPRS/EDGE and UMTS radio
networks that are important for packet data services
x Explain a GPRS/EDGE and UMTS wireless Internet data
session from beginning to end
x Describe how security, mobility/roaming and interoperability
are supported over GPRS networks
x Describe the features and services of evolving UMTS
HSDPA and HSUPA
x Compare the capabilities and limitations of other wireless
systems such as 1x, 1xEV-DO, and WiMAX
x Explore the role of VoIP, SIP, and IMS in advanced services
x Describe wireless data applications that can be used in
UMTS
Intended Audience
This course is intended for data sales and marketing engineers and
data sales executives involved in corporate sales.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Wireless Technologies and Networks Overview
(Instructor led)
Course Length
3 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Prologue
1.1. Big picture of wireless Internet
1.2. Key business and technology transitions
2. Data Communication and Internet
Fundamentals
2.1. Internet architecture
2.2. Circuit and packet switching
2.3. Bridges, routers and gateways
3. TCP/IP and Related Protocols
3.1. Types of IP addresses
3.2. IP routing and forwarding
3.3. Role of TCP and UDP for commonly
used Internet applications
3.4. Roles of the DNS
4. 2G-3G Technologies
4.1. Key operations of wireless networks
4.2. Data rates
5. 3G Comparative Landscape
5.1. CDMA2000 (1x and 1xEV-DO)
5.2. WiMAX
5.3. Capabilities and challenges
6. GSM and GPRS/EDGE
6.1. Network architecture and components
6.2. Voice and data call operations
7. UMTS, HSDPA, and HSUPA
7.1. Network architecture and components
7.2. WCDMA technology
7.3. Data services in UMTS
7.4. Evolution of HSDPA/HSUPA & LTE
8. VoIP and SIP Essentials
8.1. Network nodes for VoIP service
8.2. QoS and security for VoIP
8.3. UMA and voice call continuity
9. IP Multimedia Subsystem in UMTS
9.1. Multimedia services using IMS
9.2. Fixed Mobile Convergence (FMC)
10. Wireless Data Applications
10.1. Multimedia messaging
10.2. Email solutions
10.3. VPN access to enterprise networks
10.4. Security in GSM/UMTS networks and
the role of IPSec
10.5. Enterprise applications such as CRM
and SFA
GSM & GPRS/EDGE
Self-paced eLearning
87 2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
G
S
M

&
G
P
R
S
/
E
D
G
E
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Overview of GPRS
GSM has the lions share of the worlds wireless market. GSM has currently deployed circuit-switched data that
provide (theoretically) a data rate of 14.4 kbps. However, circuit-switched data does not meet the bandwidth
demands of the Internets data-hungry applications. The answer to GSMs need for speed is the General Packet
Radio System (GPRS). GPRS provides an architecture that allows for higher data rates. This course presents an
overview of the GPRS network, including the motivation for GPRS, the key GPRS features and the achievable data
rates of GPRS. The architecture of GPRS is presented, including the new components that support packet data
services, and the necessary modifications to the current components so they can support GPRS. The additional
enhancement of Enhanced Data Rates for GPRS Evolution (EDGE) is presented and its impact on the network is
described. Since GPRS is on the evolutionary path of GSM to UMTS, the requirements are also presented.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Distinguish circuit switched voice and packet data
x Explain the limitations of using a circuit to support packet
data
x Specify the types of applications that will be used in GPRS
x Describe why a separate network is needed for data
x List the new GPRS components
x Describe the components that were changed to support data
x Identify the key differences between supporting voice and
data from the mobile's perspective
x Discuss the deployment needs in the GSM network to
support GPRS
x Identify the evolution strategy to UMTS
Intended Audience
This course is intended for anyone seeking an overview of GPRS,
its features, and capabilities. This includes those in a design, test,
systems engineering, sales engineering, network engineering, or
verification role.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Overview of 3G Wireless Networks (eLearning)
Average Course Length
3 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
Motivation for GPRS
x Limitations of a circuit switched network
x Requirement to support packet switched
data
x The limitations of Circuit Switched Data
x New GPRS applications
GPRS Key Features
x Overview of GPRS
x Overview of the enhancements provided
by EDGE
x GPRS and EDGE expected data rates
GPRS Architecture
x Overview of GSM
x Introduction to the new GPRS
components
SGSN
GGSN
x Required modifications to the existing
network components
GPRS Mobiles
x Main types of GPRS mobiles
x Requirements on the mobile to support
packet data services
A day in the life of a GPRS mobile
x Mobile synchronization with the radio
network
x Operations between the mobile and the
GPRS core network
Evolution of GSM to GPRS and GPRS to
UMTS
x Impact of GPRS on GSM
x Strategy to evolve to GSM/GPRS to
UMTS
Summary
Put It All Together
x Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course
GSM & GPRS/EDGE
Self-paced eLearning
88 2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
G
S
M

&
G
P
R
S
/
E
D
G
E
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
GPRS Air Interface
General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) is the next evolutionary step of GSM. The difference is that the air interface
supports both circuit-switched connections (in GSM) and packet-switched connections (in GPRS). This course
provides the details of the GPRS air interface, including an understanding of the spectrum used and the radio
technology. The radio interface channels and their use are discussed. Since GPRS uses the same physical structure
as GSM, the details on how the air interface can be used to support both voice and data services as well as the
mechanism that is used to support variable data rates is presented. After exploring how the channels are configured
and can coexist with a GSM radio environment, this course explores resource allocation management in GPRS. The
resource allocation discussion includes how GPRS is capable of supporting bandwidth on demand and always
on concepts. This course breaks down how GPRS can be used to manage air interface resources more efficiently
and how computer data is packaged and presented over the air interface.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Describe the GPRS spectrum and its relationship to GSM
x Explain the channel structure in GPRS
x Describe how the GPRS service might be provided using
GSM channels
x List the various radio interface protocols
x Describe how multiple users are multiplexed into resources
as well as how one user may use multiple channels
x Explain how the Always Connected paradigm is supported
in GPRS
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a detailed understanding
of the GPRS Air Interface. This includes those in a design, test,
systems engineering, sales engineering, network engineering, or
verification role.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Overview of GPRS (eLearning)
Complementary Courses
x 3G Comparative Overview (Instructor led)
x GPRS Packet Data Operations (eLearning)
x GPRS Mobility (eLearning)
Average Course Length
3 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
GPRS Network Refresher
x Overview of the components of GPRS
x Impact of GPRS on GSM
GPRS Radio Spectrum
x Introduction to the GPRS radio spectrum
x GSM and GPRS spectrum coordination
GPRS Radio Technology
x Structure of GPRS radio interface
x GPRS protocol stack
Radio Frequency Channel Structure
x Adding GPRS to an existing GSM radio
network
x GPRS channel structure
x GPRS physical and logical channels
x Processing and preparing user data for
transmission over the air
x GPRS and GSM radio channel
coordination
Medium Access Control and Radio Link
Control Protocol Layers
x Role of the Radio Link Control Layer
x Role of the Media Access Control Layer
x Traffic channel allocation
x Difference between packet channels and
circuit switched channels
x Error correction and retransmission
End-to-End
x End-to-end packet flow
Summary
Put It All Together
x Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course
GSM & GPRS/EDGE
Self-paced eLearning
89 2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
G
S
M

&
G
P
R
S
/
E
D
G
E
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
GPRS Packet Data Operations
General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) is the packet data evolution of GSM. It supports the capability to efficiently
provide packet data services to subscribers over the existing GSM air interface. GPRS also provides a new packet
data network that supports the subscribers packet data services. This course discusses the key procedures performed
in the GPRS packet data network, including those that are performed by the mobile to make its presence known in
the network, to initiate a data session, and to deactivate the data session. A step-by-step analysis of different packet
data operations is included in the course. The GPRS protocol stack is explained to show the roles of the different
protocols in packet data operations. The course also discusses the issue of addressing in GPRS networks. Since the
GPRS network is an IP based network, the specifics of how information flows between the different GPRS
components are described in detail. In addition, the concepts of the data session establishment are solidified with a
series of real-world examples.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Discuss the purpose of the Attach Procedure
x Describe the requirements of the Packet Mobility
Management layer
x Explain the purpose of the Packet Data Protocol context
activation procedure
x Outline the requirements of the Session Management layer
x Identify what GTP is and why it is required
x Describe the basics of mobility with a data session activated
x Define GPRS accounting procedures
x Describe the use and procedure of the Packet Data Protocol
context for the sake of using a specific service
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a detailed understanding
of the processes of signaling, call establishment and packet
session establishment. This includes those in a design, test,
systems engineering, sales engineering network engineering, or
verification role.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Overview of GPRS (eLearning)
Complementary Courses
x Overview of 3G Wireless Networks (eLearning)
Average Course Length
3 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
GPRS Network Architecture
x Overview of the components of a GPRS
network
Attach Procedure
x Overview and purpose of the Attach
Procedure
x Function and contents of the SGSN
Subscriber Data Profile
x Introduction to the Packet Mobility
Management layer in the SGSN
PDP Context Activation Procedure
x Function of the Packet Data Context
Activation Procedure
x Introduction to the Session Management
layer in the SGSN
x GPRS Tunneling Protocol and
transmission of data between the SGSN
and GGSN
Session Maintenance
x Always on
x Receiving an incoming voice call during
a data session
Detach and Deactivation Procedures
x Deactivation procedure to end a data
session
x Detach procedure to disconnect from the
network
Accounting
x Circuit switched billing versus packet
switched billing
x Charging Gateway Function (CGF)
Services Examples
x A business user checking his email
x A shopper downloading a shopping list to
her PDA
Summary
Put It All Together
x Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course
GSM & GPRS/EDGE
Self-paced eLearning
90 2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
G
S
M

&
G
P
R
S
/
E
D
G
E
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
GPRS Mobility
GPRS is the technology that provides packet data access to the existing GSM networks. It is designed to support an
efficient mobile packet network. One of the greatest advantages of GPRS is that it allows a subscriber to access data
services at a higher data rate while on the move. Therefore, mobility is a key requirement for wireless data networks.
This course explores the issues of providing mobility within the GPRS network, such as how the mobile moves from
cell to cell, as well as from Serving GPRS Support Node (SGSN) to SGSN. Roaming issues for packet data services
are explored as subscribers move beyond their home service providers coverage area. GPRS has specified GPRS
Roaming Exchange (GRX) to enable data roaming between operators. This course discusses how GRX enables
roaming and the different services provided by GRX operators. By the conclusion of this course, both equipment
manufacturers and services providers will have an understanding of all the issues involved in packet data mobility
and how they are resolved in GPRS networks.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Describe the radio mobility aspects of GPRS
x Describe the requirements of location management within the
GPRS network
x Explain the mobility management messaging used to support
mobility in GPRS
x Describe the use of Access Point Names (APN) in GPRS
roaming
x List the signaling and security requirements of inter-operator
roaming
x Define the GPRS Roaming eXchange (GRX) and its use in
the GPRS network
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a detailed understanding
of the processes of signaling and mobility management for calls
or packet sessions. This includes those in a design, test, systems
engineering, sales engineering, network engineering, or
verification role.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Overview of GPRS (eLearning)
Complementary Courses
x 3G Comparative Overview (Instructor led)
x GPRS Packet Data Operations (eLearning)
Average Course Length
3 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
Mobility Management in GPRS
x Introduction to GPRS Mobility
Management
x Responsibilities of Mobility Management
x Role of the GMM Layer
Mobility at a cell level
x Cell reselection procedure
x Responsibilities of the SGSN when a
mobile moves from cell to cell
Location Management in GPRS
x GPRS location management
x Routing areas
x Coordination between GPRS routing
areas and GSM location areas
x Mobility across SGSNs
GPRS Neighbor Roaming
x Access Point Name
x Access Point Names and roaming
GPRS Global Roaming
x GPRS global roaming issues
x Functions and limitations of the GPRS
Roaming eXchange (GRX)
x Requirements of roaming between two
operators
SGSN Interactions
x SGSNs interactions with the HLR
x SGSN subscriber database
x SGSNs interactions with the MSC
Summary
Put It All Together
x Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course
by training with those who already are
expert
become
an
U
M
T
S
(
W
C
D
M
A
)
UMTS (WCDMA - R99 to R8)
UMTS (WCDMA) is an exciting technology that
is being deployed throughout the world. It
has evolved from the GSM/GPRS core network,
and redefnes the radio access network. Future
releases will introduce new concepts and fea-
tures that will give users a comprehensive,
user-friendly and personalized mobile experi-
ence of tomorrows combined voice and data
network.
The future of UMTS (WCDMA) includes a
replacement of the circuit switched core net-
work with a SIP-based network and an IP-based
radio access network. These enhancements will
provide all services on one consolidated, IP-
based wireless network.
About the Curriculum
Award Solutions UMTS (WCDMA) curriculum
offers a suite of courses appropriate for all
audiences - from executives in need of a quick
overview to designers and developers seeking
the details of the messages, the parameters
and the rationale behind the current standards.
Instructor led Courses
UMTS Essentials (R99 to R8)
Exploring UMTS (WCDMA)
Mastering UMTS (WCDMA)
Radio Networks
Mastering UMTS Radio
Networks & Signaling (R99)
Exploring HSPA+ (R7)
Mastering HSPA Networks &
Signaling (R5 & R6)
Mastering UMTS Core Networks
(R99 to R7)
UMTS LTE Essentials
Mastering UMTS LTE
Mastering UMTS LTE Protocols
& Signaling
WCDMA RF Mentoring (R99 to
R5)
IMS in UMTS Networks
Wireless Internet - From IP to
EDGE & UMTS/HSPA
Self-paced eLearning
Courses
Evolution from GSM to UMTS
Multiple Antenna Technologies
Overview of UMTS
UMTS/WCDMA Air Interface
Fundamentals
UMTS Signaling
UMTS Mobility
HSDPA (R5)
HSUPA (R6)
Overview of UMTS LTE
UMTS/WCDMA Air Interface Fundamentals eLearning Course
91
92
UMTS (WCDMA)
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
U
M
T
S
(
W
C
D
M
A
)
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
UMTS Essentials (R99 to R8)
GSM/GPRS operators worldwide continue to look to UMTS to increase their system capacity and enable
multimedia services. UMTS and its evolution HSDPA and HSUPA in the radio network and IMS in the core
network are capable of increasing system capacity and offering a rich multimedia experience to the users.
This course provides a high-level overview of the 3G network known as UMTS or WCDMA, including a discussion
of core network nodes, radio network nodes and their functionality. It also provides an overview of WCDMA the
air interface technology used in UMTS networks. In addition, the use of various codes in WCDMA, the importance
of power control and various types of handovers and its impact on the system capacity are highlighted. This course
steps through the end-to-end call scenario for voice and data calls. It also covers the evolution of UMTS in Release 5
for High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA) and IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS). It concludes with a
discussion of the landscape of the evolution of UMTS HSUPA (High Speed Uplink Packet Access), LTE (Long
Term Evolution), and SAE (System Architecture Evolution).
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Discuss the driving forces, requirements and goals of UMTS
x Describe the building blocks that will be used to construct a
UMTS network
x Discuss the key aspects of the radio technology
x Explain the Radio Access Network and the core network
x Discuss the services available in UMTS networks
x Explain how a voice call is established and maintained
x Describe how a packet data session is established
x Highlight the key aspects of HSDPA
x Explain the evolution from GSM/GPRS to UMTS to HSDPA
Intended Audience
This course is primarily intended for those seeking an overview of
UMTS, including those in product line management, business line
management, executives, sales and marketing, product support,
training and documentation and operations.
Suggested Prerequisites
x None
Course Length
1 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. UMTS Overview
1.1. UMTS requirements
1.2. Features and services
1.3. QoS and Security
1.4. Evolution roadmap of UMTS
2. UMTS Core Network
2.1. Core network interfaces and protocols
2.2. Roles of MSC, SGSN, GGSN and HLR
2.3. Evolving R4 and R5 (IMS) architectures
3. WCDMA Technology Essentials
3.1. Physical layer operation
3.2. Use of OVSF and scrambling codes
3.3. Handovers and power control
4. UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network
(UTRAN)
4.1. Network components (RNC and Node
B), interfaces, and protocols
4.2. UTRA protocol
5. System Scenarios
5.1. Packet-switched data call setup
5.2. Circuit-switched data call setup
5.3. Wireless Internet using UMTS
6. HSDPA Enhancements
6.1. Motivation and requirements of HSDPA
6.2. Key features of HSDPA
6.3. Packet Data call flow in HSDPA
7. UMTS Deployment
7.1. Spectrum for UMTS deployment
7.2. Major deployment scenarios and
challenges
7.3. Interworking with GSM/GPRS
8. Evolution of UMTS
8.1. UMTS R6 and HSUPA
8.2. IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS)
8.3. UMTS-LTE
93
UMTS (WCDMA)
Instructor led
U
M
T
S
(
W
C
D
M
A
)
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Exploring UMTS (WCDMA)
UMTS (WCDMA) is one of the 3rd generation wireless systems. UMTS is designed to increase a subscribers data
rates and system capacity. This course offers a technical overview of UMTS, focusing on the UMTS (WCDMA) air
interface, radio networks and core networks. It covers the network architecture, components and basic operations of
UMTS networks. In addition, this course explores the details of the WCDMA air interface technology and its ability
to support multiple subscribers simultaneously. Aspects of CDMA technology pertaining to the WCDMA air
interface including coding, modulation, spreading, scrambling, handovers and power control mechanisms are clearly
explained. This course then focuses on Circuit Switched and Packet Switched Core Networks. The key concepts in
the course are tied together with several system scenarios to provide insight into location management, mobility
management and handovers.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Identify the driving forces, requirements and goals of UMTS
x List the capabilities of UMTS (WCDMA)
x Explain the evolution from GSM/GPRS/EDGE networks
x Sketch the network architecture and identify the network
nodes and interfaces
x Describe how functions such as mobility management and
handovers are performed in UMTS
x Step through the setup of voice and data calls in UMTS
networks
x Identify the UMTS-GSM interworking scenarios
x Discuss the features and benefits of HSDPA and HSUPA
x Discuss the features and benefits of HSPA+
x Discuss the features and benefits of LTE
Intended Audience
This course is intended to provide a technical overview of UMTS
(WCDMA). It is appropriate for personnel in planning,
deployment, RF engineering, network performance, and network
operations.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Exploring GSM (Instructor led)
x Exploring GPRS and EDGE (Instructor led)
Course Length
2 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. UMTS (WCDMA) Overview
1.1. Motivation behind UMTS
1.2. Key features, services and supported data
rates
1.3. Technology landscape
1.4. Evolution from GSM/GPRS to UMTS
2. WCDMA Technology in UMTS
2.1. Encoding and modulation techniques
2.2. Spreading and scrambling
2.3. OVSF codes in WCDMA
2.4. Importance of power control
2.5. Macro diversity in WCDMA
3. UMTS Core Network Architecture
3.1. Network architecture
3.2. Key components (i.e., SGSN & GGSN)
3.3. Differences between GPRS and UMTS
3.4. Migrating from GPRS to UMTS
4. UMTS (WCDMA) Radio Network
4.1. Functions of UTRAN
4.2. Key Components (RNC and Node B)
5. UTRA Channels and Protocols
5.1. Channel structure in UMTS
5.2. Logical, physical and transport channels
5.3. MAC, RLC and RRC
6. Circuit-Switched Scenarios
6.1. Overview of a circuit-switched call
6.2. Call origination and termination
7. Packet-Switched Scenarios
7.1. UMTS attach procedure
7.2. PDP context activation
7.3. Establishing a packet data session
8. System Scenarios
8.1. Radio and core network mobility
8.2. Handovers and SRNS Relocation
9. Evolution of UMTS
9.1. High Speed Downlink Packet Access
(HSDPA)
9.2. High Speed Uplink Packet Access (HSUPA)
9.3. IP Multimedia Subsystems (IMS)
9.4. HSPA+
9.5. UMTS LTE
94
UMTS (WCDMA)
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
U
M
T
S
(
W
C
D
M
A
)
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Mastering UMTS (WCDMA) Radio Networks
This course covers all the key aspects of the UMTS (WCDMA) Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN) FDD
mode. It provides details of the UTRAN architecture, protocols, operations and services. Beginning with a basic call,
the student is introduced to the signaling protocols, followed by a detailed description of the physical layer
functions. Next, a packet data scenario introduces protocols (e.g., MAC, RLC), transport format sets and the basics
of radio resource management. Once this foundation has been laid, the more complex topics of concurrent service
management and bandwidth on demand are discussed. This is followed by a discussion of operations, Quality of
Service (QoS), and mobility management within the UTRAN. The final chapters include an in-depth discussion of
framing protocols, synchronization procedures and other physical layer procedures. The approach of using end-to-
end scenarios shows the application of concepts and the theory behind the concepts.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Identify the role of the UTRAN in delivering UMTS
(WCDMA) services
x List the components of the UTRAN and their roles and
responsibilities
x Describe the roles of control plane protocols (RANAP,
RNSAP, NBAP, and RRC)
x Specify the physical layer functions and procedures managed
by the UTRAN
x Explain the functions and procedures of logical, transport and
physical channels
x Describe how Quality of Service is managed and delivered
x Highlight the procedures that support intra- and inter-
UTRAN mobility
x Describe how to apply all of the concepts to create a UMTS
(WCDMA) Terrestrial Radio Access Network
x Explain the evolution of UMTS to HSDPA/HSUPA
Intended Audience
This course is primarily intended for a technical audience,
including those in system design, systems test, systems
engineering, network engineering, product support, operations,
RF engineering, UTRAN architecture and strategy and anyone
seeking a more in depth understanding of the UMTS RAN.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Exploring UMTS (WCDMA) (Instructor led)
Course Length
3 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Introduction
1.1. Introduction to UMTS and UTRAN
1.2. UTRAN nodes and interfaces
2. WCDMA Channels Overview
2.1. DL & UL Channel structure
2.2. Relationship of Logical, Transport, and
Physical channels
3. Physical Layer Functions
3.1. WCDMA Channelization Codes
3.2. Scrambling Codes
3.3. Spreading and Modulation
4. Physical Layer Operations
4.1. Uplink and downlink power control
4.2. System acquisition process
4.3. Paging and Random Access Operation
5. Voice Call Setup
5.1. RRC Connection Setup/Release
5.2. End-to-end call setup
5.3. Uu, Iub, Iu and NAS messaging
6. Data Session Setup
6.1. Packet data states
6.2. Role of PDCP and RLC
6.3. Quality of Service establishment
7. Service Reconfiguration
7.1. Service reconfiguration scenarios
7.2. Call/Session release scenarios
7.3. Concurrent service scenarios
8. UTRAN Mobility Management
8.1. Mobility while idle
8.2. Soft handover scenarios and algorithms
8.3. SRNC relocation
8.4. Intersystem and inter-technology
handovers
9. Inter-System Scenarios
9.1. UMTS GSM intersystem cell selection
9.2. UMTS GSM intersystem handover
10. RF Design, Analysis & Optimization
10.1. Network planning considerations
10.2. Coverage and capacity optimization
11. HSDPA Essentials
11.1. Motivation of HSDPA
11.2. Goals of HSDPA
11.3. Improvements to achieve higher data
rates
95
UMTS (WCDMA)
Instructor led
U
M
T
S
(
W
C
D
M
A
)
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Mastering UMTS Radio Networks & Signaling
(R99)
The idea of using a convenient wireless device for seamless mobility and access to the Internet can be quite
appealing. 3
rd
Generation wireless systems promise to realize such a vision. UMTS operators are upgrading their
wireless networks from GSM/GPRS/EDGE to UMTS so they can increase voice capacity and support higher data
rates. Therefore, a variety of services are possible, such as web browsing, MMS, streaming, VoIP and video
telephony. This course covers the signaling state machine of the UMTS (WCDMA) air interface, including
initialization operations such as system acquisition, registration and authentication. We discuss the steps of setting
up an end-to-end voice call via MSC and a R99 data call via SGSN and GGSN. We examine the importance of
mobility and soft/softer handovers and SRNS relocation. The course explores the radio bearer setup and radio
reconfiguration procedures in detail. It further covers the inter-radio access technology handover scenarios such as
UMTS to GSM/GPRS. This course also has several walkthroughs using message logs from deployed networks.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Sketch the network architecture, related protocols and
messaging architectures of UMTS networks
x Identify Uu and Iu interface messages
x Define the details of system acquisition, initialization and
authentication of the UE
x Explain the steps of setting up and maintaining an RRC
connection
x Describe the role of MAC, RLC and PDCP protocols
x Step through various handover scenarios including inter-
radio access technology (UMTS to GSM)
x Detail the operations of voice and data calls in UMTS
networks
Intended Audience
This course is primarily intended for a technical audience
including those in product design, test, systems engineering,
network engineering, product support and operations.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Exploring UMTS (WCDMA) (Instructor led)
Course Length
3 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. UMTS Overview
1.1. UMTS and UTRAN network
architecture and interfaces
1.2. UMTS services
1.3. UE and Network identities
1.4. Physical, MAC, RLC and RRC
1.5. Concept of AS and NAS
1.6. Logical, Transport and Physical
channels
2. Uu Signaling Protocols
2.1. RRC state machine and transitions
2.2. RRC procedures & message structure
2.3. Integrity
2.4. RLC and its modes (AM, UM and TM)
2.5. Ciphering
2.6. MAC-b, MAC-c/sh and MAC-d
3. RANAP and NAS Messaging
3.1. Scenarios and Procedures
3.2. Message structure
3.3. Use of SS7, ATM and IP
4. UMTS Attach
4.1. Message flow and used channels
4.2. Role of UE, RNC and Core network
5. NBAP & RNSAP
5.1. Procedures on Iub & Iur
5.2. Messages and their structure
6. PDCP and GTP
6.1. Need for data compression PDCP
6.2. Need for tunneling in UMTS - GTP
7. Data Call Setup
7.1. PDP Context Activation
7.2. End-to-end data call setup messages
based on R99
8. Voice Call Setup
8.1. End-to-end voice call setup messages
based on R99
9. Handover and Macro Diversity
9.1. Measurement Control and Active Set
management
9.2. Soft and Softer handovers
9.3. SRNS relocation
10. UMTS GSM Interworking
10.1. System selection
10.2. UMTS R99 - GSM handover
96
UMTS (WCDMA)
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
U
M
T
S
(
W
C
D
M
A
)
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Exploring HSPA+ (R7)
HSPA+ or evolved HSPA (eHSPA) is an evolution of the UMTS radio interface that is already based on Release 5 and 6 of
3GPP specifications High Speed Packet Access. With HSPA+ operators can provide higher data rates (ca. 30 Mbps) to
subscribers while making much better use of the existing spectrum, thus reducing cost per delivered bit. This exciting
development for HSPA allows wireless operators to become more aggressive in deployment of multimedia rich Internet
content. However, these advantages of HSPA+ come with increased complexity and impact to the handset and network
infrastructure. The aim of this course is to explain and make understandable the complexities involved with the HSPA+
functions and operations. This course describes features such as the use of higher order modulation, multiple antenna
techniques in WCDMA, enhanced signaling procedures, continuous packet connectivity and architectural changes. The key
functions of the HSPA+ protocol stack are explored and compared with R5 and R6 versions throughout the course. The
course ends with a discussion of the interaction and comparison between HSPA+ and its descendent LTE (Long Term
Evolution).
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Highlight the limitations of current HSPA R5/R6 wireless
networks and list the motivating factors for HSPA+
x Describe the use of multiple antenna techniques in HSPA
technologies
x Explain the network architecture of HSPA+ to support
mobile wireless Internet using continuous packet
connectivity
x Identify the following aspects of HSPA+ networks:
HSPA+ enablers
Radio access network and air interface details
RLC/MAC operations and details
Details of operation in uplink and downlink
Session setup scenarios
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those interested in an in-depth
understanding of HSPA+. It is suited for those in product
planning, design and engineering.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Mastering HSPA Networks & Signaling (R5 & R6)
(Instructor led)
Course Length
2 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Overview of HSPA Technology in R5/R6
1.1. The roadmap to HSPA+
1.2. Drivers for HSPA+
1.3. HSPA+ requirements and goals
2. Key Concepts of HSPA+
2.1. Evolved architecture
2.2. Multiple antennas
2.3. Changes for efficient operations
3. HSPA+ Architecture
3.1. R7 network architecture
3.2. eHSPA collapsed architecture
3.3. R8 network architecture
4. Multiple Antenna Technique in HSPA+
4.1. Overview of multiple antenna
techniques
4.2. MIMO in HSPA+
4.3. UE capabilities for MIMO
5. HSPA+ Physical Layer Operations
5.1. Key concepts
5.2. Channel structure and multiplexing
5.3. Physical layer operations
5.4. Power control and CQI
6. Signaling and Traffic Operations
6.1. Setup of a data session
6.2. RRC state enhanced operations
6.3. Effect on interfaces for HSPA+
signaling
6.4. Traffic operations in DL & UL
6.5. Handover and serving sector selection
7. Deployment and Interworking
7.1. Challenges in deploying HSPA+
7.2. Interworking with UTRAN and
GERAN
7.3. Interworking with other systems
97
UMTS (WCDMA)
Instructor led
U
M
T
S
(
W
C
D
M
A
)
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Mastering HSPA Networks & Signaling
(R5 & R6)
HSPA (High Speed Packet Access) enhances the packet data services provided in UMTS (WCDMA) by increasing
the data throughput and reducing delays. The HSPA network offers UMTS subscribers much higher data rates, in
both the uplink and downlink. HSPA has three key technology enhancements: link adaptation using adaptive coding
and modulation, incremental redundancy and fast scheduling. This course describes the key benefits and challenges
of the HSPA technology and the enhancements to the signaling protocols to support HSPA. The course focuses
primarily on the radio network. Emphasis is placed on the new channels and related operations. The overall
operations of HSPA, starting from measurements and ending with HARQ, are addressed in detail. The key concepts
in the course are tied together with several scenarios that offer insight into the reconfiguration of the radio link and
mobility. The course concludes with a series of detailed end-to-end scenarios of an HSPA data call and simultaneous
voice and data services in UMTS.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x List the driving forces behind HSPA
x Describe the key technological enhancements
x Sketch the network architecture, related protocols and
messaging architectures of HSDPA/HSUPA networks
x Explain how incremental redundancy will be used to improve
the retransmissions mechanisms
x Describe how the fast scheduling functions will reduce the
delays associated with sending packet data to the end-users
x Step through the establishment of a packet data session and
reconfiguration of the radio link
x Describe how fast scheduling at the Node B reduces the
delays associated with packet data transmission
x Identify the signaling enhancements required to set up an
HSDPA-based data call
x Describe the detailed operations of HSDPA such as CQI
determination, DL scheduling and HARQ operation
x Identify the signaling enhancements required to set up an
HSDPA-based data call
x Describe the detailed operations of HSUPA such as grant
assignments, E-TFC selection and HARQ operation
x Step through various handover scenarios including inter-
radio access technology (HSDPA/HSUPA to R99 to GPRS)
Intended Audience
This course is primarily intended for a technical audience,
including those in RF engineering, systems engineering, network
engineering, product support, operations, and anyone seeking a
more in depth understanding of the HSPA.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Mastering UMTS Radio Networks & Signaling (R99)
(Instructor led)
Course Length
3 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Overview of HSPA
1.1. Motivation for HSPA
1.2. Key features
1.3. Impact to system capacity and data rates
2. Key Concepts of HSPA
2.1. Adaptive Modulation and Coding (AMC)
2.2. Fast scheduling function at Node B
2.3. UE measurement and reporting
2.4. Incremental redundancy Hybrid ARQ
3. New HSDPA Channels
3.1. DL Channels (HS-DSCH and HS-SCCH)
3.2. UL Channels - CQI and ACK
4. HSDPA Physical Layer Operations
4.1. Determination of channel quality indication
4.2. Structure and timing of HS-SCCH
4.3. Achieving high data rates on the HS-DSCH
5. New HSUPA Channels
5.1. Enhanced uplink channels
5.2. Downlink grant & HARQ channels
6. HSUPA Traffic Channel Operations
6.1. UE capabilities and E-DCH assignment
6.2. Uplink grant operations of Node B
6.3. Adaptive coding and modulation
7. HSDPA/HSUPA Architecture/Protocols
7.1. Physical, MAC, RLC and RRC
7.2. Functionality of MAC
8. HSDPA/HSUPA Data Call Setup
8.1. Idle mode procedures
8.2. RRC connection setup
8.3. UMTS attach and PDP context
9. HSDPA Traffic Operations
9.1. Radio bearer setup enhancements
9.2. HSDPA channel assignments
9.3. Handover and sector switching
10. HSUPA Traffic Operations
10.1. Radio bearer setup enhancements
10.2. HSUPA channel assignments
10.3. Absolute and relative grant assignment
10.4. Handover and sector switching
11. Scenario 3: Multi-Services
11.1. HSDPA/HSUPA and AMR call
11.2. End-to-end call scenarios
12. Scenario 4: HSDPA/HSUPA Interworking
12.1. HSDPA/HSUPA - UMTS handover
12.2. HSDPA/HSUPA GPRS/EDGE handover
98
UMTS (WCDMA)
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
U
M
T
S
(
W
C
D
M
A
)
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Mastering UMTS Core Networks (R99 to R7)
UMTS (WCDMA), an evolution of GSM and GPRS, created a platform to converge the worlds of speech, data
services and the Internet, to create a global market for mobile multimedia. This course contains an overview of the
evolved core networks in different releases of UMTS from Release 4 to Release 7. Release 4 is considered a
stepping stone to an All-IP network with a separation of the MSC into an MSC-server and a media gateway. This
course covers an overview of UMTS and its vision for the next generation all-IP multimedia networks known as IP
Multimedia Subsystems (IMS). This course provides an overview of the various concepts used in IMS architecture,
functions, components and interfaces. Enabling technologies such as SIP, MEGACO and IPv6 and the use of these
technologies within the IMS architecture will be studied. A discussion of Quality of Service (QoS) follows, with a
presentation of key protocols and the scenarios associated with QoS. This course includes the discussion on IMS
services like presence, group management and messaging. This course explains the principles of making IMS
access agnostic. Voice Call Continuity (VCC) between IMS and a circuit switched environment will be studied.
Simplified architecture in Release 7 to reduce the latency will be studied.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Identify the driving forces, requirements and goals of the
UMTS evolved core networks
x Describe the building blocks used to construct Release 5
x List the functions of the UMTS Release 5, Release 6 and
Release 7 architecture
x Explain the signaling and transport protocols like SIP, BICC,
Megaco and RTP
x Step through end-to-end service establishment flows in the
Release 5, Release 6 and Release 7 architectures
x Explain the scenarios that illustrate interworking with the
PSTN and legacy wireless networks
x Identify various services that are supported in Release 6
x Describe how session border controller enables access of a
common IMS network with different access technologies like
CDMA 200, WiMAX, etc
x Explain Voice Call Continuity (VCC) which enables an IMS
subscriber on a VoIP call to continue the call into a circuit
switched environment.
x Describe reduction of latency in Release 7 with a simplified
architecture
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those in design, development,
engineering and product management on UMTS core networks.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Exploring UMTS (WCDMA) (Instructor led)
Course Length
3 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. R99 UMTS Architecture
1.1. UMTS network architecture
1.2. UMTS releases and their goals
1.3. UMTS circuit and packet switched
domains
2. R4 Bearer Independent CS Core Network
2.1. Motivation of Release 4
2.2. Reference architecture
2.3. Signaling and transport
3. R5 IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS)
Architecture
3.1. Motivation for Release 5
3.2. Architecture, components and functions
3.3. Interfaces and protocols
4. IMS Signaling and Transport Protocols
4.1. SIP, SDP & MEGACO
4.2. Use of SIP and MEGACO in UMTS
4.3. RTP and RTCP
5. IMS Scenarios
5.1. Registration
5.2. Call origination and termination
5.3. Roaming and handovers
5.4. PSTN and UMTS IMS
6. Quality of Service
6.1. QoS techniques (IntServ, DiffServ)
6.2. End-to-end QoS architecture
6.3. QoS allocation scenarios
7. Services Architecture
7.1. Services architecture and role of
application servers
7.2. Subscriber profiles and triggers
8. R6 Enhancements to IMS
8.1. New services
8.2. Group management
8.3. QoS enhancements
8.4. Session border controller
9. R7 One Tunnel Architecture
9.1. Different options
9.2. Interface changes
9.3. Scenarios
10. Voice Call Continuity
10.1. Architecture
10.2. Scenarios
99
UMTS (WCDMA)
Instructor led
U
M
T
S
(
W
C
D
M
A
)
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
UMTS LTE Essentials
UMTS LTE (Long Term Evolution) is an evolution of the UMTS radio interface based on OFDM and MIMO
technologies. UMTS LTE provides much higher data rates (over 100 Mbps) to users while reducing cost-per-bit for
UMTS service providers. OFDM facilitates higher data rates over a wireless medium. This is very exciting to
wireless operators who are eager to deploy multimedia rich Internet content over a wireless medium with seamless
access anywhere, anytime. This one day course describes the simplified architecture of UMTS LTE, the downlink
and uplink frame structure, OFDM operations at the physical layer, and resource management and scheduling
considerations at the MAC layer. In addition, the deployment and interworking issues with GSM and UMTS
networks are explored. It also describes the competitive landscape by comparing features and services provided by
other 4G systems such as WiMAX and the 3GPP2 evolution of 1xEV-DO.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Highlight the limitations of current 3G wireless networks and
list the motivating factors for 4G
x Explain the network architecture of UMTS LTE to support
mobile wireless Internet
x Identify the following aspects of UMTS LTE networks:
Architecture, capabilities and capacity
Radio access network and air interface details
High speed data support
Services and quality of service
x Describe the interworking of LTE with 3GPP and non 3GPP
technologies
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those interested in an in-depth
understanding of UMTS LTE. It is suited for those in product
planning, design and engineering.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Mastering HSPA Networks & Signaling (R5 & R6)
(Instructor led)
x Overview of OFDM (eLearning)
x OFDM Fundamentals (Instructor led)
x Multiple Antenna Technologies (eLearning)
Course Length
1 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Introduction
1.1 Limitations of 3G networks
1.2 Drivers for UMTS LTE
1.3 Underlying technology OFDM and
simplified core network
2. UMTS LTE Networks
2.1 System Architecture Evolution (SAE)
2.2 Interface and protocols
3. Enhanced UMTS Air Interface (E-UTRA)
3.1 LTE air interface in DL & UL
3.2 Downlink frame structure
3.3 Uplink frame structure
3.4 LTE channels and mapping
3.5 MIMO in LTE
4. Signaling and Traffic Operations
4.1 System acquisition and idle mode
operations
4.2 LTE call setup
4.3 Traffic operations in DL & UL
4.4 Power control
4.5 Handover and serving sector selection
5. Deployment and Interworking
5.1 Interworking with UMTS and GSM
5.2 Interworking with 4G systems
100
UMTS (WCDMA)
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
U
M
T
S
(
W
C
D
M
A
)
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Mastering UMTS LTE
UMTS LTE (Long Term Evolution) is an evolution of the UMTS radio interface based on OFDM and MIMO
technologies. UMTS LTE provides much higher data rates (over 100 Mbps) to users while reducing cost-per-bit for
UMTS service providers. OFDM facilitates higher data rates over a wireless medium. This is very exciting to
wireless operators who are eager to deploy multimedia rich Internet content over a wireless medium with seamless
access anywhere, anytime. This two-day course describes the simplified architecture of UMTS LTE and moves on
to OFDM and MIMO, which are the foundation technologies for several different 4G systems. The course also
covers the downlink and uplink frame structure, OFDM operations at the physical layer, and resource management
and scheduling considerations at the MAC layer. In addition, the deployment and interworking issues with GSM and
UMTS networks are explored. It also describes the competitive landscape by comparing features and services
provided by other 4G systems such as WiMAX and the 3GPP2 evolution of 1xEV-DO.
Note: This course is based on the draft version of the 3GPP specifications.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Highlight the limitations of current 3G wireless networks and
list the motivating factors for 4G
x Describe the use of OFDM and multiple antenna techniques
in 4G technologies and compare OFDM operations with
CDMA
x Explain the network architecture of UMTS LTE to support
mobile wireless Internet
x Identify the following aspects of UMTS LTE networks:
Architecture, capabilities and capacity
Radio Access Network and air interface details
High speed data support
Services and Quality of Service
x Compare and contrast the features of the UMTS LTE air
interface with UMB (1xEV-DO Rev C) and Mobile WiMAX
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those interested in an in-depth
understanding of UMTS LTE. It is suited for those in product
planning, design and engineering.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Mastering HSPA Networks & Signaling (R5 & R6)
(Instructor led)
Course Length
2 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Introduction
1.1. Limitations of 3G networks
1.2. 4G technology and market drivers
1.3. High data rate requirements
1.4. Drivers for UMTS LTE
1.5. Underlying technology OFDM and
Simplified Core Network
2. UMTS LTE Networks
2.1. System Architecture Evolution (SAE)
2.2. Interfaces and protocols
2.3. Evolution path from current UMTS
networks
3. OFDMA and Multiple Antenna Essentials
3.1. OFDM signal definition
3.2. Multi-path and cyclic prefix
3.3. Subcarriers and subchannels
3.4. Concepts of OFDMA
3.5. OFDMA vs. CDMA
3.6. Multiple antenna techniques
4. Enhanced UMTS Air Interface (E-UTRA)
4.1. Key concepts
4.2. Downlink frame structure
4.3. Uplink frame structure
4.4. Physical layer operations
4.5. Support for MIMO
5. Signaling and Traffic Operations
5.1. System acquisition and idle mode
operations
5.2. Resource management strategies
5.3. Traffic operations in DL & UL
5.4. Power control
5.5. Handover and serving sector selection
6. Deployment and Interworking
6.1. Interworking with UMTS and GSM
6.2. Interworking with other 4G systems
7. 4G Technologies Comparison
7.1. Compare and contrast with WiMAX and
UMB (1xEV-DO Rev C)
101
UMTS (WCDMA)
Instructor led
U
M
T
S
(
W
C
D
M
A
)
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Mastering UMTS LTE Protocols & Signaling
In the wireless landscape, the path from 3G to 4G is being defined. On the UMTS/3GPP side, the proposal for the
next generation wireless network is known as the Long Term Evolution (LTE). LTE promises dramatic
improvements in throughput and latency, thus opening a new era in the Quality of Experience (QoE) perceived by
wireless subscribers. These enhancements are based on three fundamental pillars: a new air interface
(OFDM+MIMO), simplified network architecture (no RNCs) and an efficient signaling mechanism. Signaling in
LTE is instrumental in reducing latency as well as provisioning, modifying, and reconfiguring the Quality of Service
(QoS). This course takes a detailed look at the layer 2 and 3 signaling procedures as defined in the 3GPP
specifications. The main focus is on UE-to-E-UTRAN signaling, with an overview of the end-to-end scenario
involving the IMS component of the core network.
Note: This course is based on the draft version of the 3GPP specifications.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Sketch the network architecture, related protocols,
procedures and functions of the LTE network and its
elements
x Identify the air interface, S2 and X2 messages, procedures
and parameters for troubleshooting and optimization
x Explain the detailed setup and monitoring of the RRC
connection between the UE and the E-UTRAN
x Describe the role of the MAC, RLC and PDCP protocols and
the HARQ parameters
x Describe various handover scenarios and the associated
signaling procedures
x Describe inter-system handover mechanisms, in particular
the 4G to 3G/2G scenario
x Walk through a VoIP/data call setup
Intended Audience
This course is primarily intended for a technical audience in
design, test, systems engineering or product support with a
signaling background in UMTS or other systems who wants to
understand LTE signaling details
Suggested Prerequisites
x Overview of UMTS LTE (eLearning)
x Mastering UMTS LTE (Instructor led)
Course Length
2 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Overview of LTE
1.1. LTE requirements
1.2. Architecture and node functions
1.3. LTE bearers & QoS Model
2. LTE Signaling Model
2.1. Radio protocol architecture
2.2. LTE channels overview
2.3. LTE air interface protocol stack
2.4. S1 interface & protocols
2.5. X2 interface & protocols
3. Scenario: RRC setup
3.1. Overview of PHY layer
3.2. Power-up acquisition
3.3. System Information Broadcasting
3.4. Access signaling
3.5. RRC signaling
3.6. PHY layer parameters
4. Scenario: IP address allocation
4.1. Attach signaling
4.2. MME Selection
4.3. Authentication procedure
4.4. Security procedure
4.5. P-GW selection
4.6. Default bearer configuration
5. Scenario: Service setup
5.1. Service request
5.2. QoS in LTE
5.3. Admission Control
5.4. Radio Bearer setup
6. Scenario: Downlink Traffic Handling
6.1. Channel Quality Report Signaling
6.2. DL Scheduling
6.3. DL Control Signaling
6.4. DL Shared channel
6.5. HARQ
7. Scenario: Uplink Traffic Handling
7.1. Schedule request
7.2. UL Scheduler
7.3. Control Signaling
7.4. UL Shared channel
7.5. HARQ
8. Mobility Scenarios
8.1. Cell selection/reselection/TA Update
8.2. Idle & Active states
8.3. Inter LTE handover
8.4. LTE/HSPA/EDGE handovers
8.5. Non-3GPP handovers
102
UMTS (WCDMA)
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
U
M
T
S
(
W
C
D
M
A
)
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
WCDMA RF Mentoring (R99 to R5)
UMTS allows operators to provide higher data rates and more capacity in their networks. This unique mentoring
workshop delves deep into the behavior of UMTS in real-world environments, providing insights into the symptoms
and possible causes of field performance issues. This workshop is divided into two parts. The first part is an on-site
kickoff (3 days), and the second part consists of eight weekly half-day online mentoring sessions. Optionally, these
eight weekly half-day sessions can be combined into two on-site workshops (3 days each). The kickoff session
provides a practical overview of UMTS. In addition, it provides the participants the necessary foundation in UMTS
performance principles required to optimize a UMTS network (e.g. coverage and containment, neighbor list tuning,
access performance, drop call analysis, R99 and HSDPA packet switched performance, IRAT analysis, and system
capacity assessment). The following eight sessions will build on this knowledge by allowing the participants to
utilize post processing tools selected by the local market to assess data collected within that market. Participants
will obtain hands on experience by using the market tools to collect, assess, and optimize actual market data.
Learning Objectives
After completing this workshop, the student will be able to:
x List the Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) of the UMTS
network and the factors affecting them
x Explain the detailed operation of UMTS functions and
vendor specific algorithms
x Assess RF coverage and containment issues and recommend
corrective action
x Troubleshoot access failures and list vendor specific
parameters affecting access performance
x Understand the root cause of dropped calls and recommend
solutions
x Identify the key parameters and conditions that affect R99
and HSDPA throughput, latency and performance
x Explain procedures and the vendor specific parameters
related to IRAT
x Understand system capacity and how it is impacted by
parametric settings
x Use their own post-processing tools to analyze common
performance-related scenarios
Intended Audience
This in-depth mentoring program is intended for wireless network
operators, particularly RF professionals involved in cell planning
and design, system design, RF engineering, and RF optimization.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Mastering UMTS Radio Networks & Signaling (R99)
(Instructor led)
x Familiarity with drive test and post-processing tools
Length of Mentoring Program
3 day on-site kickoff session, plus 8 weekly half-day online
mentoring sessions
Special Note
Market-specific drive test logs, configuration data, as well as vendor
documentation are needed three weeks prior to the mentoring sessions to deliver
maximum value for the attendees.
Kickoff Session Outline
1. WDCMA Radio Performance Fundamentals
1.1. Key Performance Indicators (KPIs)
1.2. High level optimization process
1.3. Planning a WCDMA network
1.4. WCDMA versus GSM measurements
2. WDCMA Technology Review
2.1. UTRAN architecture
2.2. RRC, RLC, and MAC overview
2.3. UMTS Channels and RRC states
2.4. Physical layer overview
3. RF Coverage
3.1. Defining the right coverage
3.2. Key plots for assessing coverage
3.3. Pilot pollution analysis
3.4. Coverage analysis
4. Neighbor List Tuning
4.1. WCDMA versus GSM NL strategies
4.2. Rules for NL selection
4.3. Scanner based NL tuning techniques
4.4. Vendor specific algorithms
5. Access Performance
5.1. Call setup overview
5.2. Sources of access failures
5.3. Random access procedure
5.4. Parameters related to access
6. Dropped Calls and Call Quality
6.1. Dedicated channel operations
6.2. Sources of dropped calls
6.3. Soft handover parameters
6.4. UL versus DL drops
7. Packet Switched Data Performance
7.1. Key plots for assessing throughput
7.2. Relevant metrics for PS performance
7.3. Throughput efficiency
7.4. Performance and capacity tradeoffs
8. HSDPA Technology & Performance Overview
8.1. HSDPA overview
8.2. HSDPA performance issues
9. Inter-Radio Access Technology (IRAT)
Performance
9.1. Idle/connected mode IRAT overview
9.2. Parameters related to IRAT
9.3. Performance impacts related to
parameters
10. Radio Capacity Optimization
10.1. Overview of limited resources
10.2. Capacity versus quality impacts
10.3. Method for determining system capacity
103
UMTS (WCDMA)
Instructor led
U
M
T
S
(
W
C
D
M
A
)
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
IMS in UMTS Networks
UMTS (WCDMA) creates a platform to converge the different worlds of voice and data services to create a global
market for mobile multimedia. This two-day course is intended for those seeking an overview of UMTS vision for
the next generation All-IP multimedia networks known as IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS). This course provides an
overview of the various concepts used in IMS architecture, functions, components and interfaces. Enabling
technologies such as SIP, MEGACO and IPv6 and the use of these technologies within the IMS architecture will be
studied. This course also explains the motivation behind this architecture and system flows using various
components. A discussion of Quality of Service (QoS) follows, with a presentation of key protocols and the
scenarios associated with QoS. This course includes the discussion on IMS services like Presence, Group
Management and Messaging. This course explains the principles of making IMS access agnostic. Voice Call
Continuity (VCC) between IMS and a circuit switched environment will be studied. It concludes with a brief
discussion on transition from R99 to IMS.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x List the driving forces, requirements and goals of the UMTS
Core Networks
x Describe the building blocks that will be used to construct the
Release 5 IMS Core Networks
x List the functions of the UMTS Release 5 IMS architectures
x Explain the signaling and transport protocols like SIP, BICC,
Megaco and RTP
x Sketch the end-to-end service establishment flows in the
Release 5 IMS architecture
x Depict scenarios that illustrate interworking with the PSTN
and legacy wireless networks
x Identify various services that are supported in Release 6
x Describe how Session Border Controller enables access of a
common IMS network with different access technologies like
CDMA 200, WiMAX etc
x Explain Voice Call Continuity (VCC) which enables an IMS
subscriber on a VoIP call to continue the call into a circuit switched
environment.
x Explain how functions such as mobility, roaming and call
processing are carried out in the new architecture
Intended Audience
This course is intended to provide a technical overview of the
UMTS IMS Core Networks. It is appropriate for all technical
personnel, including those in product management, planning,
architecture, design and deployment.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Exploring UMTS (WCDMA) (Instructor led)
Course Length
2 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Introduction
1.1. Overview of Next Generation Wireless
Networks
1.2. VoIP and related services in UMTS
2. IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) Architecture
2.1. Reference and architecture diagram
2.2. Components and functions
2.3. Interfaces and protocols
2.4. Addressing in IMS
3. IMS Signaling Protocols
3.1. SIP and SDP
3.2. MEGACO
3.3. Use of SIP and MEGACO in UMTS IMS
3.4. Real Time Protocol (RTP)
3.5. Real Time Control Protocol (RTCP)
4. IMS Scenarios & Operations
4.1. Registration
4.2. Call origination and termination
4.3. Roaming and handovers
5. Mobility in IMS
5.1. Mobility within IMS domain
5.2. Mobility between IMS and Non-IMS
domain
6. IMS Quality of Service
6.1. End-to-end QoS architecture
6.2. QoS protocols (RSVP, DiffServ)
6.3. QoS allocation scenarios
7. IMS Services
7.1. Service architecture and role of Application
Servers
7.2. Subscriber profiles and triggers
8. Enhancements of R6
8.1. New Services
8.2. Presence
8.3. Lawful Intercept
8.4. Group Management
8.5. QoS Enhancements
8.6. Session Border Controller
9. Enhancements of R7
9.1. Voice Call Continuity
9.2. Architecture
9.3. Scenarios
10. Transitioning from R99 to IMS
10.1. Evolution to IMS core networks
104
UMTS (WCDMA)
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
U
M
T
S
(
W
C
D
M
A
)
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Wireless Internet - From IP to EDGE &
UMTS/HSPA
A successful sales and marketing campaign for wireless Internet over 3G networks is key to the success of 3G data
services. Therefore, sales and marketing groups need a good conceptual understanding of GPRS/EDGE, UMTS, IP
and the Internet, as well as the benefits, limitations and competitive positioning of applications technologies. After
taking this course, the student will be able to: (a) understand the needs of the end consumer and corporate users, (b)
help develop appropriate solutions for corporate client needs, (c) effectively communicate with IT managers using
IT terminology, (d) discuss the network architecture and operations of GPRS/EDGE, UMTS and IP networks, (e)
help customers develop solutions to migrate legacy devices and application to GPRS/EDGE networks, (f) assess the
impact of the evolution of GPRS/EDGE to UMTS/HSPA (WCDMA) technologies, and (g) develop appropriate
competitive technical positioning.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Describe how GPRS/EDGE, UMTS, LAN, WLAN, PAN,
PSTN and the Internet come together to provide 3G data
services
x Define the terminology of GPRS/EDGE, UMTS and
enterprise IP networks
x Describe the role of IP and TCP/UDP in the Internet
x Detail how IP packets are exchanged between the mobile
user and the Internet
x Explain Internet functions such as Firewalls and the DNS
x Describe the features of GPRS/EDGE and UMTS radio
networks that are important for packet data services
x Explain a GPRS/EDGE and UMTS wireless Internet data
session from beginning to end
x Describe how security, mobility/roaming and interoperability
are supported over GPRS networks
x Describe the features and services of evolving UMTS
HSDPA and HSUPA
x Compare the capabilities and limitations of other wireless
systems such as 1x, 1xEV-DO, and WiMAX
x Explore the role of VoIP, SIP, and IMS in advanced services
x Describe wireless data applications that can be used in
UMTS
Intended Audience
This course is intended for data sales and marketing engineers and
data sales executives involved in corporate sales.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Wireless Technologies and Networks Overview
(Instructor led)
Course Length
3 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Prologue
1.1. Big picture of wireless Internet
1.2. Key business and technology transitions
2. Data Communication and Internet
Fundamentals
2.1. Internet architecture
2.2. Circuit and packet switching
2.3. Bridges, routers and gateways
3. TCP/IP and Related Protocols
3.1. Types of IP addresses
3.2. IP routing and forwarding
3.3. Role of TCP and UDP for commonly
used Internet applications
3.4. Roles of the DNS
4. 2G-3G Technologies
4.1. Key operations of wireless networks
4.2. Data rates
5. 3G Comparative Landscape
5.1. CDMA2000 (1x and 1xEV-DO)
5.2. WiMAX
5.3. Capabilities and challenges
6. GSM and GPRS/EDGE
6.1. Network architecture and components
6.2. Voice and data call operations
7. UMTS, HSDPA, and HSUPA
7.1. Network architecture and components
7.2. WCDMA technology
7.3. Data services in UMTS
7.4. Evolution of HSDPA/HSUPA & LTE
8. VoIP and SIP Essentials
8.1. Network nodes for VoIP service
8.2. QoS and security for VoIP
8.3. UMA and voice call continuity
9. IP Multimedia Subsystem in UMTS
9.1. Multimedia services using IMS
9.2. Fixed Mobile Convergence (FMC)
10. Wireless Data Applications
10.1. Multimedia messaging
10.2. Email solutions
10.3. VPN access to enterprise networks
10.4. Security in GSM/UMTS networks and
the role of IPSec
10.5. Enterprise applications such as CRM
and SFA
105
UMTS (WCDMA)
Self-paced eLearning
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
U
M
T
S
(
W
C
D
M
A
)
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Evolution from GSM to UMTS
UMTS has been designed as the next evolutionary step of GSM and GPRS. UMTS was developed with the
requirement that an existing GSM operator can evolve their network to UMTS in stages. This course describes the
evolutionary steps a typical operator will have to go through to support UMTS. The first step of this evolution is to
move from the voice-only network of GSM to the voice and packet network of GPRS. The GPRS step provides
limited packet capabilities as an interim step to UMTS. UMTS, the second evolutionary step, is designed to support
a highly efficient air interface, data rates up to 2 Mbps and the existing core network that is used in GSM and GPRS.
In both steps, the discussion includes the types of additional equipment required, the impact on the air interface and
the impact on the existing network to add the additional components. In conclusion, the next phases of UMTS are
presented. This will include a discussion of the architecture and benefits of the IP Multimedia Subsystem and the
All-IP Radio Access Network.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Learn the differences between a Packet Switched Network
and the Circuit Switched Network
x Explain how GSM can evolve to GPRS and what new
services are provided
x Describe how GSM/GPRS can evolve to UMTS
x Specify the new services that will be provided
x Discuss the future of UMTS
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a detailed understanding
of the evolution of GSM to UMTS. This includes those in a
design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering network
engineering, or verification role.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Overview of UMTS (eLearning)
Complementary Courses
x Overview of 3G Wireless Networks (eLearning)
Average Course Length
3 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
Characteristics of Packet Switched and
Circuit Switched Networks
x Differences between circuit switched and
packet switched networks
x Inefficiencies and limitations of circuit
switched data
Evolution from GSM to GPRS
x Introduction to GPRS
x New GPRS components
x Benefits and limitations of GPRS
New Services with GPRS
x Service capabilities of GPRS
x Always connected
x Bandwidth on demand
x GPRS data rates
Evolution from GSM/GPRS to UMTS
x Introduction to UMTS
x New UMTS components
x Benefits and limitations of UMTS
New Services with UMTS
x Service capabilities of UMTS
x UMTS and supporting Quality of Service
x UMTS data rates
x Backward compatibility with GSM/GPRS
Future of UMTS
x IP Multimedia Subsystem
x All-IP Radio Access Network
Summary
Put It All Together
x Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course
106
UMTS (WCDMA)
Self-paced eLearning
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
U
M
T
S
(
W
C
D
M
A
)
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Multiple Antenna Technologies
Advanced multiple antenna technologies enable emerging 4G cellular technologies to achieve superior data rates
over the air interface (e.g., in excess of 100 Mbps). While 4G networks utilize an efficient multiple access technique
called OFDMA (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access), OFDMA on its own cannot deliver the expected
superior throughput in 4G systems. Multiple antenna techniques play a critical role in increasing spectral efficiency.
This course provides fundamental knowledge of numerous multiple antenna techniques that will be an integral part
of emerging radio access standards. The antenna basics are explained, along with typical antenna configurations in
commercial cellular deployments. Major antenna techniques covered in the course include transmit/receiver
diversity techniques such as space-time coding (STC), beamforming techniques such as an adaptive beamforming
system, multiple input multiple output (MIMO) spatial multiplexing techniques, and space/spatial division multiple
access (SDMA). In summary, this course provides a strong foundation for advanced antenna technologies.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Outline key benefits and challenges of multiple antenna
techniques
x Provide examples of various types of multiple antenna
techniques
x Explain transmit and receive diversity techniques such as
Space Time Coding and antenna grouping
x Contrast a switched-beam system with an adaptive
beamforming technique
x Describe MIMO- Spatial Multiplexing techniques
x Discuss the implementation of SDMA
x Give examples of the multiple antenna techniques defined in
emerging 4G cellular networks
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a fundamental
understanding of how various multiple antenna techniques work.
This includes those in a design, test, systems engineering, sales
engineering, network engineering, or verification role.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Overview of 3G Wireless Networks (eLearning)
Complementary Courses
x Overview of OFDM (eLearning)
Average Course Length
3 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
Introduction to Antenna Techniques
x Antenna basics: transmit and receive
operation, antenna parameters, and
antenna gain characteristics
x Motivation for advanced antenna
techniques
x Example of antenna configurations: omni
and sectorized systems, 1 transmit and 1
receive antenna, 1 transmit and 2 receive
antennas with space and polarization
diversity
x Summary of multiple antenna techniques,
including advantages and challenges
Transmit and Receive Diversity Techniques
x Basic techniques (space, time, and
frequency)
x Advanced transmit diversity techniques
including STC, frequency/space, and
antenna grouping/selection
x Receive diversity
Beamforming Techniques
x Construction of a beam
x Transmit and receive beamforming
x Switched-beam system
x Adaptive beamforming system
x Benefits and challenges of beamforming
MIMO- Spatial Multiplexing
x Basics of spatial multiplexing
x Horizontal and vertical encoding, single-
code word and multi-code word
x MIMO Transmitter and Receiver
Examples
x Closed-loop MIMO (MIMO + precoding)
x Collaborative spatial multiplexing
x Benefits and challenges of MIMO-SM
Summary
Put It All Together
x Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the course objectives
107
UMTS (WCDMA)
Self-paced eLearning
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
U
M
T
S
(
W
C
D
M
A
)
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Overview of UMTS
UMTS creates a platform to converge the worlds of speech, data services and the Internet to create a global market
for mobile multimedia. This course discusses the broad scope of UMTS, its characteristics, its features and its
evolution from second generation architecture. It also provides the student with a sampler, which draws the
attention of the students to various areas of UMTS such as the access network, core network, services from voice to
multimedia and the future of UMTS.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Identify some of the applications that are envisioned for
mobile phones of the future
x Provide a summary of the limitations of 2G wireless
networks
x Explain the key characteristics of 3G systems and the genesis
of UMTS
x Highlight key characteristics of UMTS including QoS
x Describe the path for UMTS standards release structure and
timeline
x Outline the 2G GSM and 2.5G EDGE/GPRS networks and
their evolution to the UMTS architecture
x Explain the traffic flow process in a GPRS network
x Identify the elements of the UMTS architecture and
understand their interfaces
x Discuss how the roles of network components have changed
from 2G and 2.5G architectures to those of the UMTS
architecture
x Describe traffic delivery of circuit switched and packet
switched information within the UMTS network
Intended Audience
This course is intended for anyone seeking an overview of
UMTS, its features and capabilities.
Suggested Prerequisites
x None
Complementary Courses
x Overview of 3G Wireless Networks (eLearning)
Average Course Length
2.5 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
Evolution to 3G
x Requirements of 3G
x 3G key characteristics
Genesis of UMTS
x History of UMTS
x UMTS requirements on 3G
x UMTS versus GSM/GPRS
UMTS Key Features
x UMTS features
x UMTS and the 3G requirements
x Backward compatibility with GSM/GPRS
x UMTS QoS classes
GSM/GPRS/EDGE Architecture
x GSM voice architecture
x GPRS data architecture
x Enhancements provided by EDGE
UMTS Road map of Releases
x Features provided in release 99
x Release 4 features
x Release 5 features
UMTS Core Network Architecture
x Core Network architectural components
x Core Network functional responsibilities
UMTS Terrestrial Radio Network
x Architectural components of the RAN
x Responsibilities of the RAN
UMTS Interfaces
x UMTS interfaces and protocols
Summary
Put It All Together
x Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course
108
UMTS (WCDMA)
Self-paced eLearning
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
U
M
T
S
(
W
C
D
M
A
)
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
UMTS/WCDMA Air Interface Fundamentals
UMTS is an evolution of GSM and GPRS. The air interface has been changed from a Time Division Multiple
Access (TDMA) based system to a Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) based air interface. This
change was required to achieve the data rate of 2 Mbps to the mobile, which is a 3G requirement. This course
provides the details of the UMTS WCDMA air interface, known as UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA). The
WCDMA physical layer is key to achieving higher data rates and supporting new features. This course provides an
overview of the physical layer. In addition, power control and soft handover, important features of any CDMA air
interface, are discussed. The UMTS defined radio interface includes a number of channels, which are presented with
an explanation of their usage. This course concludes with a discussion of how high data rates and multiple
simultaneous services are delivered using UMTS.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Explain spreading factor codes in UMTS WCDMA
x Describe the use of scrambling codes for source
identification in both the uplink and downlink in WCDMA
x Describe power control operations in the UMTS WCDMA
system
x Explain the basics of soft handoff processing from the
perspective of the physical layer
x Identify the features designed into the WCDMA system
which enable high data rates
x Describe the types of channels found in the UMTS radio
interface and their purpose
x Explain how concurrent services are supported by UMTS
radio interface
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a detailed understanding
of the WCDMA air interface that is used in UMTS. This includes
those in a design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering
network engineering, or verification role.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Overview of UMTS (eLearning)
Complementary Courses
x 3G Comparative Overview (Instructor led)
x UMTS Signaling (eLearning)
x UMTS Mobility (eLearning)
Average Course Length
3 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
UMTS WCDMA Overview
x Introduction to Wideband CDMA
UMTS WCDMA Channels
x Overview of UMTS channel structure
WCDMA Physical Layer Processing
x Protection of data
x Separation channels
x Scrambling codes
WCDMA Power Control
x Introduction to power control
x Requirements of power control
x WCDMA power control process
Soft Handover in WCDMA
x Introduction to soft handover
x The RAKE receiver
x Inter radio access technology handover
procedure
Delivering High Data Rates in UMTS
x Variable length spreading factors
x Impact of protection on data rates
x How to achieve 2 Mbps
1. - QPSK modulation
2. - Multiple codes
Concurrent Services, an Air Interface
Perspective
x Support of multiple simultaneous services
by the mobile
x Support concurrent services
x Communication of information between
the UE and the network
Summary
Put It All Together
x Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course
109
UMTS (WCDMA)
Self-paced eLearning
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
U
M
T
S
(
W
C
D
M
A
)
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
UMTS Signaling
The need for a 3G network to provide more value added services to wireless subscribers has become apparent.
UMTS provides a new, "open" communications universe that will allow service providers to supply a host of new
services. All of these services are offered in UMTS using two basic mechanisms. The first is circuit switched call
setup to support the traditional voice based services. The second is packet-switched data session establishment. This
is used to establish data sessions based on the services bandwidth and Quality of Service requirements. This course
offers an eLearning experience of UMTS signaling. This course also discusses the processes of establishing a
circuit-switched voice call and a packet-switched data session.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Highlight the differences between user plane and control
plane
x Specify different radio access signaling and core network
signaling protocols
x Define the basic circuit-switched call setup in UMTS
x Explain how the signaling and control mechanisms are used
in UMTS
x Define the Always connected paradigm in UMTS networks
x Describe traffic delivery of packet data information within
the UMTS network
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a detailed understanding
of the processes of signaling, call establishment and packet
session establishment. This includes those in a design, test,
systems engineering, sales engineering network engineering, or
verification role.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Overview of UMTS (eLearning)
Complementary Courses
x Overview of 3G Wireless Networks (eLearning)
x UMTS Mobility (eLearning)
Average Course Length
1.5 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
Signaling and User Traffic in UMTS
x Signaling responsibilities of network
elements
x Overview of the UMTS signaling (or
control) plane
x Overview of the UMTS traffic (or user)
plane
x UMTS radio access signaling
mechanisms
x UMTS core network signaling
mechanisms
x Signaling protocols on the Iub, Iur and Iu
interfaces
Making a Circuit Switched Phone Call in
UMTS
x Call establishment process
x Information that is exchanged during call
establishment
x Circuit switched core network protocol
model
Starting a Packet Session in UMTS
x UMTS support for the Always
connected paradigm
x Data session establishment process
x Information that is exchanged in data
session establishment
x Tunneling
x Packet switched core network protocol
model
Summary
Put It All Together
x Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course
110
UMTS (WCDMA)
Self-paced eLearning
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
U
M
T
S
(
W
C
D
M
A
)
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
UMTS Mobility
UMTS is designed to provide value-added services, many of which will allow the subscriber to receive services
while on the move. This course discusses the process of managing mobility in UMTS networks. Mobility
management is required while the mobile is idle, in a circuit-switched voice call or in a packet-switched data
session. This course covers all these aspects of mobility. In addition, certain UMTS specific mobility features are
discussed, and the participants are provided with an understanding of the mobility aspects of the UMTS network.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Describe the UMTS radio mobility aspects
x Define the requirements of location management within the
UMTS network
x Discuss core network mobility including location areas and
routing areas
x Illustrate the differences between mobility when the mobile
is idle and when the mobile is connected
x Explain the mobility management messaging used to support
mobility in UMTS
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a detailed understanding
of the processes of signaling and mobility management during a
call or a packet session. This includes those in a design, test,
systems engineering, sales engineering, network engineering, and
verification.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Overview of UMTS (eLearning)
Complementary Courses
x Overview of 3G Wireless Networks (eLearning)
x UMTS Signaling (eLearning)
Average Course Length
1.5 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
Mobility Management in UMTS
x Introduction to Mobility Management
functions
x Mobility Management responsibilities
Mobility Management when the Mobile is
Idle
x Location tracking when the mobile is in
idle mode
x Responsibilities of the mobile in idle
mode
Mobility Management when the Mobile is
Connected
x Location tracking when the mobile is
connected to the network
x Responsibilities of the mobile when it is
connected
x Mobility management procedures when
the mobile is using common channels
x Mobility management procedures when
the mobile is using dedicated channels
Serving Radio Network Controller (SRNC)
Relocation
x Responsibilities of the SRNC
x Support provided by the DRNC
x Procedures used in SRNC relocation
Seamless Mobility in UMTS
x Requirements of seamless mobility
x Procedures for seamless mobility
Summary
Put It All Together
x Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course
111
UMTS (WCDMA)
Self-paced eLearning
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
U
M
T
S
(
W
C
D
M
A
)
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
HSDPA (R5)
UMTS networks are being rapidly deployed in many parts of the world to support 3G voice and packet data
services. As the UMTS subscriber base grows, operators are looking to support next generation packet data services
that require very high data rates. To compete with other technologies such as 1xEV-DO, the UMTS standards group
has defined High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA) as part of the UMTS (Release 5) standards. This course
provides an overview of the HSDPA R5 technology. It describes the key concepts used in the wireless environment
to support high data rates, and examines how these concepts are applied within the HSDPA R5 standards. In
addition, it discusses the impact of HSDPA R5 support on the UMTS network architecture by highlighting key
changes at different nodes. HSDPA R5 specific channels are introduced followed by a detailed discussion of the
HSDPA physical layer operations. A discussion of UMTS and HSDPA R5 interworking is also presented. The
course concludes with an end-to-end HSDPA R5 call flow.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Describe HSDPA R5 at a high level
x Define important features of HSDPA R5 including peak data
rates, new channels and architectural changes
x Discuss the key concepts used in HSDPA R5 to achieve high
packet data rates over the air
x Analyze the steps taken in HSDPA R5 physical layer
operations to support high speed packet data
x Describe the role of the scheduler in HSDPA R5
x Explain how HSDPA R5 achieves data rates over 10Mbps
x Discuss cell switching operation on the traffic channel
x Walk though an end-to end HSDPA R5 call flow
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking an understanding of
HSDPA R5 technology and how it supports high speed packet
data. This includes those in product management, design, test,
systems engineering, sales engineering, network engineering, RF
deployment engineering, field engineering and operations roles.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Overview of UMTS (eLearning)
x UMTS/WCDMA Air Interface Fundamentals (eLearning)
Complementary Courses
x UMTS Signaling (eLearning)
x UMTS Mobility (eLearning)
Average Course Length
3 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
HSDPA R5 Introduction
x High-level solution
x Data rates supported
x Packet data characteristics
x How does HSDPA address packet data
characteristics?
HSDPA R5 Key Concepts
x Link adaptation UMTS vs. HSDPA
x Fast channel quality reporting
x TDM-CDM scheduling
x Adaptive modulation
x Hybrid ARQ
HSDPA R5 Architecture
x UTRAN architecture review
x HSDPA R5 functions
x HSDPA R5 impact to UTRAN
architecture
x Implementation impact on UE and
UTRAN
HSDPA R5 Downlink channels
x HS-DPCCH functions
x HS-SCCH functions
x HS-DSCH functions
x Timing relationship between channels
HSDPA R5 Downlink Operation Details
x Physical layer packet transmission details
x Hybrid ARQ
x How do we get high data rates?
x Traffic channel scheduler
1. UE HSDPA processing steps
Mobility
x Active set management
x Traffic channel cell switching
End-to-End Call Flow
x Example end-to-end HSDPA R5 call flow
Summary
Put It All Together
x Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course
112
UMTS (WCDMA)
Self-paced eLearning
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
U
M
T
S
(
W
C
D
M
A
)
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
HSUPA (R6)
UMTS networks are being rapidly deployed in many parts of the world to support 3G voice and packet data
services. As the UMTS subscriber base continues to grow, operators want to support next generation packet data
services that require very high data rates. To compete with other technologies such as 1xEV-DO, the UMTS
standards group has defined High Speed Uplink Packet Access (HSUPA) as part of the UMTS (Release 6)
standards. This course provides an overview of HSUPA technology. It describes the key concepts used in the
wireless environment to support high data rates, and examines how these concepts are applied within the HSUPA
standards. In addition, it discusses the impact of HSUPA support on the UMTS network architecture by highlighting
key changes at different nodes. HSUPA specific channels are introduced followed by a detailed discussion of the
HSUPA physical layer operations. A discussion of UMTS and HSUPA interworking is also presented. This course
concludes with an end-to-end call flow using HSDPA and HSUPA.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Describe HSUPA at a high level
x Define important features of HSUPA including peak data
rates, new channels and architectural changes
x Discuss the key concepts used in HSUPA to achieve high
packet data rates over the air
x Analyze the steps taken in HSUPA physical layer operations
to support high speed packet data
x Explain the role of the scheduler in HSUPA
x Walk through an end-to-end HSUPA call flow
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking an understanding of
HSUPA technology and how it supports high speed packet data.
This includes those in product management, design, test, systems
engineering, sales engineering, network engineering, RF
deployment engineering, and field engineering and operations
roles.
Suggested Prerequisites
x UMTS/WCDMA Air Interface Fundamentals (eLearning)
x HSDPA (R5) (eLearning)
Average Course Length
3 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
Introduction
x Capabilities and limitations of UMTS and
HSDPA
x Motivation for HSUPA
x Supported data rates of HSUPA
Key Concepts of HSUPA
x Effective interference / load control
x Fast scheduling at Node B
x Absolute and relative grants
x Hybrid ARQ
HSUPA Architecture Enhancements
x HSUPA impact to UTRAN architecture
x HSUPA functions
x Implementation impact on UE and
UTRAN
Enhanced Channels of HSUPA
x Enhanced Uplink Channels E-DCH and
related channels
HSUPA Operations
x Physical layer packet transmission details
x How do we get high data rates?
Mobility and Power Control
x Mobility and handover enhancements
x Power control strategy for E-DCH
End-to-End Call Flow
x Example end-to-end HSUPA call flow
Summary
Put It All Together
x Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course
113
UMTS (WCDMA)
Self-paced eLearning
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
U
M
T
S
(
W
C
D
M
A
)
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Overview of UMTS LTE
UMTS Long term Evolution (LTE) is one of the choices for next generation broadband wireless networks. Its high
data rates enable advanced multimedia applications. This eLearning course offers a quick and concise overview of
LTE networks and the OFDM-based air interface. The LTE network architecture, network interfaces and protocols,
air interface and mobility aspects are covered to provide an end-to-end view of the network. This course provides a
high-level glimpse into the life of an LTE User Equipment (UE) by walking through various stages from power-up
time all the way to setting up an IP address and exchanging traffic. This course then looks at typical LTE
deployment scenarios to complete the picture. By the conclusion of this course, the student will understand what
LTE offers, its network architecture, how it works, and potential applications and services.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Describe the state of wireless networks and trends for next
generation wireless networks
x Sketch the UMTS System Architecture Evolution (SAE) for
LTE and its interfaces
x Describe OFDM concepts and how it is used in LTE
x Define the key features of the LTE air interface
x Walk through UE operations from power-up to service setup
x Explain how uplink and downlink traffic are handled in LTE
networks
x Walk through a high level service flow setup on an end-to-
end basis
x Explain deployment scenarios of LTE networks
Intended Audience
This course is an end-to-end overview of UMTS LTE networks,
so it is targeted for a broad audience. This includes those in
design, test, sales, marketing, system engineering and deployment
groups.
Suggested Prerequisites
x None
Average Course Length
3 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
Setting the stage
x UMTS networks: R99, HSPA
x Trends for next generation wireless
networks
x LTE network changes
x LTE Air interface changes
LTE Network Architecture
x UMTS System Architecture Evolution
(SAE)
x Network architecture and interfaces
x SAE nodes and functions
x Impact of SAE
x Protocol stacks for network interfaces
LTE air interface
x Shared radio channel concepts
x OFDM/OFDMA, SOFDMA SC-FDMA
concepts
x Protocol stack
x Air interface channel structure
x Channel characteristics
LTE UE operations
x System acquisition
x Synchronization
x Initial access procedures
x Data service setup
LTE Traffic handling
x Downlink traffic handling
x Uplink traffic handling
LTE Mobility
x Cell selection/reselection
x Handover
Deployment
x Typical LTE deployment scenarios
Summary
Put It All Together
x Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course
expert
become
an
by training with those who already are
114
by training with those who already are
expert
become
an
expert
become
an
Wireless Fundamentals
It is important for individuals in the wireless
industry to fully understand the fundamentals
of wireless networks. Operators continue to
deploy more and more advanced features and
technologies, and without a solid foundation
in 3G networks and the mobile Internet, one
could get lost.
About the Curriculum
Award Solutions has assembled a comprehen-
sive curriculum suitable to both individuals new
to the wireless industry as well as experienced
veterans who wish to learn about 3G. The
courses take students from the basics to the
advanced 3G networks.
Award Solutions Wireless Fundamentals curric-
ulum offers a suite of courses in both eLearning
and instructor led formats in order to appeal to
executives looking for a quick overview as well
as consultants preparing to infuence the devel-
opment of future products.
Overview of 3G Wireless Networks eLearning Course
Instructor led Courses
Wireless and 3G Basics
Wireless Technologies and
Networks Overview
Wi-Fi Essentials
3G Comparative Overview
Self-paced eLearning
Courses
Overview of 3G Wireless
Networks
Wi-Fi Overview
3G Comparative Overview Instructor led
Course
W
i
r
e
l
e
s
s
F
u
n
d
a
m
e
n
t
a
l
s
115
116
Wireless Fundamentals
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
W
i
r
e
l
e
s
s
F
u
n
d
a
m
e
n
t
a
l
s
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Wireless and 3G Basics
Wireless systems have come a long way from early systems based on analog technogies to current 3G wireless
technologies that use various digital technologies such as TDMA and CDMA. This course provides an introduction
to wireless networks, including an overview of the key components of the wireless network architecture (i.e., MSC,
VLR, HLR, and BTS). It also provides an overview of various 3
rd
generation wireless systems such as CDMA2000
and UMTS.
This course demystifies the terminology and acronymns commonly used in the wireless industry. In addition, it
compares and contrasts the various wireless techniques and standards such as CDMA and GSM. In this course, you
will learn the steps required to set up and maintain a voice call, paging operation in cellular networks, roaming
scenarios and handovers/handoffs. It also includes a path to the emerging 3G networks, and discusses the
characteristics of 3G systems, including methods to achieve higher data rates and offer multimedia services in a
mobile wireless environment.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Sketch the wireless network architecture and components for
CDMA2000, GPRS/EDGE and UMTS
x Enumerate the network operations including registration, call
setup, call delivery and handovers
x List the challenges of radio communication
x Explain the key differences between CDMA and GSM
(TDMA)
x Determine the driving forces behind 3G networks
x Outline the evolutionary path from 2G to 3G networks
x Define the basic 3G characteristics
x Illustrate the services possible with 3G
x Describe CDMA2000, UMTS and GPRS/EDGE
Intended Audience
The course is for participants with little or no wireless knowledge.
The diverse nature of this course makes it suitable for beginners
in various disciplines of the wireless industry, including those in
project management, sales, marketing, finance, system design,
system test, systems and network engineering, product support
and operations.
Suggested Prerequisites
x None
Suggested Follow-up Training
x UMTS Essentials (R99 to R7) (Instructor led)
x 1xEV-DO Essentials (Instructor led)
x WiMAX Essentials (Instructor led)
Course Length
1 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Introduction to Wireless
1.1. History and evolution of wireless
communication
1.2. Introduction to network architecture and
operations
2. Wireless Network Operations
2.1. Steps necessary to establish a voice call
2.2. Registration/location update process
2.3. Call setup
2.4. Paging
2.5. Roaming
2.6. Handoffs/handovers
3. Radio Basics
3.1. Frequency spectrum
3.2. Terminology and acronyms
3.3. Factors affecting propagation
3.4. Counter measures and techniques used
4. Evolution to 3G Networks
4.1. Air interface technologies
4.2. Network architectures
4.3. TDMA: 2G - 2.5G GSM/GPRS
4.4. CDMA: IS-95 to CDMA2000 (1x)
5. 3G Network Overview
5.1. Driving forces for 3G networks
5.2. Major 3G technologies
5.3. Network architecture
5.4. Data rates
5.5. Support for mobility
6. CDMA2000
6.1. Network architecture (Mobile IP, AAA)
6.2. Radio interface (1x and 1x-EV-DO)
6.3. Capabilities & Limitations
6.4. Voice and data call flow
7. GPRS to UMTS
7.1. Network architecture evolution
7.2. Evolution of radio interface
7.3. Capabilities and Limitations
7.4. End-to-end call flow
7.5. Emerging wireless solutions (Fixed
Mobile convergence; All IP networks)
117
Wireless Fundamentals
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
W
i
r
e
l
e
s
s
F
u
n
d
a
m
e
n
t
a
l
s
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Wireless Technologies and Networks Overview
Wireless systems have come a long way from early systems based on analog technogies to current 3G wireless
technologies that use various digital technologies such as TDMA and CDMA. This course provides a
comprehensive overview of wireless technologies and networks. It presents radio access technologies and the most
important aspects of wireless networks and their inner workings. A detailed description of the wireless network
architecture and network operations and services is given. In addition, the course discusses the differences between
various 2G and 3G access technologies and standards, including GSM/GPRS, CDMA2000 and UMTS air interface
standards. The course also discusses the network standards known as IS-41 and GSM-MAP. A discussion on the
basics of the packet data architecture used for a mobile user to connect to an IP network such as the Internet is
followed by an introduction to 3G wireless network architectures and technologies and their motivations. At the
conclusion of this course, the students will have a solid understanding of wireless network components, access
technologies and services.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x List the various types of communication and basic concepts
related to mobile wireless networks
x Describe the wireless network architecture and its
components
x Describe network operations including call setup, roaming,
call delivery, security, mobility and handoffs
x Explain access technologies such as GSM, CDMA2000 and
UMTS
x Describe network technologies, including IS-41 and GSM
x Describe the enhanced services of wireless networks such as
SMS, WAP, location services and emergency services
x List the motivating factors for deploying 3G networks
Intended Audience
This course is for participants who are new to the wireless
industry. The diverse nature of this course makes it suitable for
participants in various disciplines including project management,
product support and operations.
Suggested Prerequisites
x None
Suggested Follow-up Training
x Exploring UMTS (WCDMA) (Instructor led)
x Mastering 1x Networks and Signaling (Instructor led)
x Exploring GPRS and EDGE (Instructor led)
Course Length
2 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Introduction
1.1. History of wireless communication
1.2. Types of wireless communication
2. Wireless Network Operations
2.1. Call setup
2.2. Registration/location update
2.3. Roaming
2.4. Security and privacy
2.5. Handoffs/handovers
3. Wireless Network Architecture
3.1. Core Network Nodes (MSC, HLR,
AuC)
3.2. Radio Access Network Nodes (BSC,
BTS)
3.3. Packet Data Nodes (SGSN, GGSN,
PDSN, AAA and HA)
4. Radio Basics
4.1. RF terminology
4.2. Cell site configuration
4.3. Frequency planning
4.4. Power control
5. Air Interface and Network Standards
5.1. Access technologies
5.2. Air interface standards: GSM, CDMA
5.3. Network standards: SS7, GSM-MAP,
IS-41
6. Wireless Features and Services
6.1. Short Message Service (SMS)
6.2. WAP and Location Services
6.3. CALEA and E-911
7. 3G Networks
7.1. Motivation for 3G
7.2. 3G network overview
7.3. CDMA2000 and UMTS
118
Wireless Fundamentals
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
W
i
r
e
l
e
s
s
F
u
n
d
a
m
e
n
t
a
l
s
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Wi-Fi Essentials
Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) is ubiquitous in enterprises, small offices, home offices, and public hotspots. A good
conceptual understanding of Wi-Fi architectures, technologies, capabilities, security features, and deployment
challenges is essential for those in the Wi-Fi field. This course provides a broad overview of the chief aspects of
Wi-Fi networks. It begins with an exploration of the current wireless landscape and defines where Wi-Fi fits. The
Wi-Fi architecture and its components are introduced to provide an end-to-end view of the Wi-Fi network along
with various applications of Wi-Fi such as local area mobility, VPN, VoIP and FMC/UMA. The course then covers
the different flavors of Wi-Fi technologies as well as the landscape of various Wi-Fi-related technologies, including
security technologies. It also provides an overview of important Wi-Fi operations such as connection setup,
bandwidth allocation schemes, and mobility. The course continues with a discussion of thin and fat access points,
mesh Wi-Fi together with some of their applications. In addition, deployment issues are explored, including
interference, how WiFi fits into an existing enterprise network and interworking with PCS/Cellular networks. The
course also discusses key players and their role in the Wi-Fi ecosystem.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Describe the landscape of wireless networks and how Wi-Fi
fits in with these
x Differentiate the roles of the Wi-Fi Alliance and the IEEE
x Sketch the key Wi-Fi architectures while pointing out the
protocols and interfaces
x List some key Wi-Fi applications such as local area wireless
connectivity, VPN, VoIP, and FMC
x List and define various 802.11-based air interface
technologies
x Explain how Wi-Fi fits into existing enterprise networks
x Discuss how security is achieved in Wi-Fi networks, and list
some of the technologies deployed in these networks
x Differentiate between thin and fat access points and their
applications
x Identify the challenges in Wi-Fi deployments
Intended Audience
This course is designed for a broad audience, including those
involved with customer support, operations, sales and marketing,
product and project management, as well as those in engineering
who can benefit from a broad overview of Wi-Fi. This course is
not designed to provide extensive details, and hence is not
appropriate for those seeking detailed technical knowledge of Wi-
Fi. It is, however, an essential first step towards advanced Wi-Fi
knowledge development, and is thus recommended for those
considering advanced study.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Welcome to IP Networking (eLearning)
Course Length
1 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Motivation and Overview
1.1. History of Wi-Fi and 802.11
1.2. Current state of wireless networks
1.3. Drivers for WiFi networks
2. Wi-Fi Architecture
2.1. Wi-Fi network architecture and
topology
2.2. Deployment scenarios (enterprise,
hotspot, home office)
3. Wi-Fi Technology Overview and Standards
3.1. Technology overview
3.2. Family of 802.11 and evolution from
802.11b to 802.11n
3.3. Security and encryption in 802.11i
3.4. QoS and support in 802.11e
3.5. Mesh networking and 802.11s
4. Wi-Fi Operations
4.1. Connection setup
4.1.1. Scanning
4.1.2. Joining (association)
4.1.3. Authenticating
4.2. Bandwidth allocation
4.3. Support for mobility
4.4. End-to-end Flow
5. Wi-Fi Applications
5.1. Internet access
5.2. Enterprise/VPN access
5.3. Voice over Wi-Fi
6. Security over Wi-Fi
6.1. Security and authentication
6.2. WEP and AES
6.3. Application layer security
7. WiFi Deployment Scenarios
7.1. Thin and fat access points
7.2. Coverage and capacity
7.3. Mesh networking
7.4. Unlicensed bands
7.5. Interworking
7.5.1. Wi-Fi/Cellular integration
7.5.2. Wi-Fi/Enterprise integration
7.5.3. Fixed Mobile Convergence (FMC)
7.6. Case study
119
Wireless Fundamentals
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
W
i
r
e
l
e
s
s
F
u
n
d
a
m
e
n
t
a
l
s
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
3G Comparative Overview
Mobile wireless networks are evolving at a rapid pace to offer faster and more efficient Internet connectivity. Data
rates over 1 Mbps are quite feasible in various wireless networks such as 1xEV-DO, UMTS (HSDPA), and
WiMAX. However, we want to separate the reality from the hype, and move from theoretical data rates to practical
data rates. We also want to understand the features, limitations, deployment and interworking scenarios. In addition,
we need to examine the roles of key players for these next generation wireless networks.
This course provides a comparative overview of the next generation of wireless technologies. It focuses on the two
major wireless technologies and their evolution roadmap: UMTS and 1x/1xEV-DO. This course also provides a
comparative analysis with WiMAX an emerging mobile wireless network that offers data rates over 10 Mbps. This
course compares the technologies based on a number of factors including data rates, services and mobility. By the
conclusion of the course, the student will have a good understanding of the capabilities and differentiators of the
competing technologies.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Describe the landscape of 3G Wireless networks
x Step through the evolutionary path from existing wireless
networks to next generation wireless networks
x Explain the network architecture of UMTS, 1x/1xEV-DO
and WiMAX to support mobile wireless Internet
x Identify the following aspects of UMTS and 1x/1xEV-DO
networks:
Architecture, capabilities and capacity
High speed data support
Deployment scenarios and interworking with existing
wireless networks
x Compare the features and capabilities of 1x evolution with
UMTS evolution
x Explain how WiMAX compares and competes with the
evolving 3G wireless networks
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those interested in a comparison of the
key wireless data technologies. It is suited for sales and
marketing personnel as well as product managers.
Suggested Prerequisites
x None
Course Length
1 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. 3G Landscape
1.1. Evolution of wireless networks
1.2. Current state of wireless networks
1.3. Drivers for next generation networks
2. CDMA2000 (1x & 1xEV-DO Rev 0)
2.1. 1x and 1xEV-DO network architecture
2.2. Data calls in 1x and 1xEV-DO networks
2.3. Benefits and challenges
2.4. Interworking between 1x and 1xEV-DO
3. UMTS R99 (W-CDMA)
3.1. Evolution from GSM/GPRS networks
3.2. UMTS network architecture
3.3. Scenarios for voice and packet calls
3.4. Benefits and challenges
3.5. Interworking with GSM/GPRS
networks
4. 1xEV-DO Rev A and MMD
4.1. Motivation for 1xEV-DO (Rev A)
4.2. Peak and average data rates
4.3. VoIP calls in 1xEV-DO networks
4.4. Benefits and challenges
4.5. Deployment scenarios
4.6. Multimedia domain Benefits and
challenges
5. UMTS R5 & R6 HSDPA/HSUPA and IMS
5.1. Motivation for UMTS R5 & R6
5.2. Peak and average data rates
5.3. HSPDA - Benefits and challenges
5.4. IP Multimedia Services Benefits and
challenges
5.5. HSUPA Benefits and challenges
6. Mobile WiMAX
6.1. Role of 802.16 and WiMAX Forum
6.2. WiMAX network architecture
6.3. Benefits and challenges
6.4. Interactions with other technologies
7. 3G Technologies Comparison
7.1. Comparison of wireless data networks
and their features and services
7.2. Deployment timeline
7.3. Deployment by region
120
Wireless Fundamentals
Self-paced eLearning
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
W
i
r
e
l
e
s
s
F
u
n
d
a
m
e
n
t
a
l
s
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Overview of 3G Wireless Networks
The term 3G has been used to describe the next generation of wireless technology. However, what does 3G really
mean? Is it a specific technology? Is it a specific architecture? 3G is a set of requirements that describe the next
generation of wireless technology. They are based on bandwidth, architecture and Quality of Service. Since this is a
set of requirements, there is not a single standard for 3G. This course provides a description of the 3G requirements
as well as an overview of the 3
rd
Generation wireless technologies, including their history, standards and
architecture. Also included is an overview of 2G networks (GSM, IS-136 and IS-95), the limitations of those
networks and the motivations for enhancing the network to support 3G requirements. The evolutionary step of 2.5G
networks (GPRS/EDGE), their benefits and limitations are also discussed.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Describe the evolution of cellular voice networks as they
evolve to provide high-speed, cost effective access to the
Internet and corporate intranets
x Identify 2G network architecture, associated air interface
technologies, and the data services they provide
x Describe the limitations of 2G networks and technologies and
why 3G is needed
x List the major 2.5G and 3G technologies of CDMA2000,
GPRS/EDGE and UMTS
x Identify the possible evolutionary paths from 2G solutions to
2.5G and 3G
x Explain the differences between the various 2G, 2.5G and 3G
architectures
Intended Audience
This course is intended for anyone seeking an understanding of
3G wireless networks, their features and capabilities.
Suggested Prerequisites
x None
Average Course Length
1.5 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
Evolution of Wireless
x Limitations of first generation wireless
networks
x Capabilities and limitations of second
generation wireless networks
2G Networks
x Architectural overview of 2G networks
x Capabilities of each of 2G network
Evolution to 3G
x 3G network requirements
x Driving forces behind 3G
CDMA2000 Architecture
x Overview of the architecture of
CDMA2000
x Additional CDMA2000 requirements
x Influence of IS-95 on the CDMA2000
architecture
GPRS/EDGE Architecture
x Overview of the architecture of
GPRS/EDGE
x Additional GPRS/EDGE requirements
x Influence of GSM on the GPRS/EDGE
architecture
UMTS Architecture
x Overview of the architecture of UMTS
x Additional UMTS requirements
x Influence of GSM/GPRS on the UMTS
architecture
Summary
Put It All Together
x Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course
121
Wireless Fundamentals
Self-paced eLearning
W
i
r
e
l
e
s
s
F
u
n
d
a
m
e
n
t
a
l
s
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
W
i
r
e
l
e
s
s
F
u
n
d
a
m
e
n
t
a
l
s
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Wi-Fi Overview
Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) is becoming as ubiquitous as microwaves in enterprises, home offices and hotspots. This
eLearning course offers a quick and concise overview of the Wi-Fi network and architecture. It begins with an
overview of the current landscape of wireless networks, describing where Wi-Fi fits. The Wi-Fi network architecture
and its components are introduced to provide an end-to-end view of the Wi-Fi network along with various
applications of the technology, different flavors of Wi-Fi technologies and the landscape of Wi-Fi related
technologies. The end-to-end view of a Wi-Fi connection setup and traffic flow is also explored.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Describe Wi-Fis place in the landscape of wireless networks
x Sketch the Wi-Fi network architecture and its interfaces
x List key applications on Wi-Fi such as local area wireless
connectivity, VPN, VoIP, and FMC
x List and define various 802.11 based air interface Wi-Fi
technologies
x Sketch how Wi-Fi fits into existing enterprise networks
x Identify the options for Wi-Fi deployment
Intended Audience
This course is an overview of Wi-Fi and designed for a broad
audience, including customer support, operations,
sales/marketing, product and project management and those in
engineering who want a broad overview of Wi-Fi.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Welcome to IP Networking (eLearning)
Average Course Length
3 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
Motivation and Overview
x History of Wi-Fi and 802.11
x Current state of wireless networks
x Drivers for Wi-Fi networks
Wi-Fi Architecture
x Wi-Fi Network architecture and
topology
x Deployment scenarios (enterprise,
hotspot, home office)
Wi-Fi Technology Overview and standards
x Technology overview
x Family of 802.11 and evolution from
802.11b to 802.11n
x Overview of 802.11i, 802.11e and
802.11s
End to End Connection Setup
x Walk through of connection setup
x End-to-end flow
Wi-Fi Applications
x Internet access
x Enterprise/VPN access
x Voice over Wi-Fi
Security over Wi-Fi
x Security and authentication
x WEP and AES
x Application layer security
Wi-Fi Deployment Scenarios
x Coverage and capacity
x Unlicensed bands
expert
become
an
by training with those who already are
122
by training with those who already are
expert
become
an
I
P

C
o
n
v
e
r
g
e
n
c
e

IP Convergence
Instructor led Courses
ATM and IP Fundamentals
IP Convergence Essentials
Exploring IPv6
Voice and Video over IP
Protocols and Technologies
Exploring MPLS
SIP Signaling
Exploring IMS
IMS in UMTS Networks
VoIP and SIP in 1x/1xEV-DO
MMD Networks
Self-paced eLearning
Courses
Welcome to IP Networking
Overview of MPLS
Multiple Antenna Technologies
IP Convergence Overview
Overview of IMS
Voice and Video over IP (VoIP)
Overview
IP Quality of Service
Session Initiation Protocol
Seamless Mobility
Overview of MMD (IMS) in
1x/1xEV-DO Networks
One of the key changes in the communication
networks will be an evolution toward All-IP-
based core networks. In these networks, both
voice and data services are provided by one
consolidated network. Operators will be able
to provide voice, video and data services with
a single unifed core network.
There are many benefts to converged IP
networks. For operators, these integrated
networks offer cost savings in operating costs.
They also enable operators to offer integrated
multimedia services combining voice and data
services. As every communication network
moves to IP-based networks, seamless mobil-
ity can be achieved by moving to All-IP-based
networks.

About the Curriculum
Award Solutions IP Convergence curriculum
focuses on advanced technologies and provides
a suite of courses to help prepare employees
for designing, deploying and optimizing tomor-
rows networks. Our courses provide end-to-
end coverage of the technologies and explain
how they are deployed in different wireless
networks. These courses are useful for those
who need to understand how to deploy and sell
new services over the Internet.
IP Convergence Essentials Instructor led Course
123
124
IP Convergence
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
I
P

C
o
n
v
e
r
g
e
n
c
e
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
ATM and IP Fundamentals
As GSM service providers build their UMTS network, a good understanding of ATM and IP is essential in the
operations of the UMTS network. Fundamental understanding of ATM and IP and their uses in a UMTS network is
a must for all network professionals. This course provides essentials of ATM and IP and their applications in the
UMTS network. The course begins with a brief review of UMTS architecture. Next, a description is given of key
concepts and terms that are used in ATM, and use of ATM to carry both voice and IP packets. The essentials of
TCP/IP networking and their applications in networks are also presented. The course then describes key protocols
used in IP networks (e.g. TCP/IP) along with their key characteristics. Finally, some of the tools used in the IP world
to troubleshoot basic connectivity issues are discussed.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Sketch the ATM network architecture for UMTS
x Describe the minimum ATM configuration for the Iu, Iub,
and Iur interfaces
x Differentiate between different types of virtual permanent
connections
x Sketch IP network architecture
x Draw network connectivity for IP network deployment
options
IP over ATM
Pure IP WAN
x Identify current and future applications using TCP/IP
x Differentiate between routing and forwarding
x Describe role of key protocols used in IP networks
x Identify key tools and utilities to help with debugging
Suggested Prerequisites
x Overview of UMTS (eLearning)
x Welcome to IP Networking (eLearning)
Course Length
1 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. ATM in UMTS Overview
1.1. UMTS architecture and ATM
1.2. Key uses of ATM in UMTS
1.3. Introduction to cells and ATM
2. ATM Concepts and Terms
2.1. What is an ATM connection?
2.2. Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA)
and transport
2.3. ATM Adaptation Layers (AAL)
2.3.1. AAL2
2.3.2. AAL5
2.4. AAL2 signaling
2.5. Use of the Connection ID (CID)
2.6. IP over ATM
3. IP Network Architecture & Deployment
Scenarios
3.1. Review the IP network architecture
3.1.1. Hub, bridge, router, server,
proxy, firewall
3.2. IP over ethernet
3.3. IP over ATM
3.4. IP in UMTS networks
4. IP Fundamentals
4.1. IP in the OSI model
4.2. Key IP characteristics
4.3. IP header & IP addressing
4.4. IP forwarding & delivery
5. TCP & UDP
5.1. Role of TCP and key characteristics
5.2. Role of UDP and key characteristics
6. 4. Supporting Tools and Utilities
6.1. IP config, ping, traceroute
6.2. Network sniffers
125
IP Convergence
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
I
P

C
o
n
v
e
r
g
e
n
c
e
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
IP Convergence Essentials
As wireless and wireline networks mature, data usage increases, and network infrastructure and services become
more IP-centric, more personnel will be responsible for managing and working with IP-centric networks. A solid
understanding of IP and data communications will be essential for personnel at all levels to be effective in a data-
oriented environment. This course provides the background and concepts to understand the motivations of networks
converging towards IP. It discusses the challenges of transport of media (voice and video) using IP (VoIP) as the
transport service in telecommunication networks. It presents the unique flavor of this challenge from the perspective
of the three basic types of network for the telecommunications world access networks, core networks, and services
network.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x List the key motivations for voice and video over IP
x Define IP convergence
x Describe the use of IP as transport in access networks
x Discuss the use of IP as transport in core networks and the
associated major technologies
x Outline the use of IP as transport in services networks and the
associated major technologies
x Explain the possible evolution paths of networks today
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a high level
understanding of the convergence toward IP-centric networks.
This includes those in sales, marketing, project management,
technical management, and executive management.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Welcome to IP Networking (eLearning)
Course Length
1 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. State of the Industry
1.1. Defining IP convergence
1.2. Motivations for convergence
1.2.1. Quad play
1.2.2. OPEX
1.2.3. Other converged services
1.3. What are voice and video over IP?
1.4. Where is the industry going?
1.5. Markets and regulatory environment
1.6. Discontinuities?
1.7. Common approaches in networks
2. IP Convergence in Access Networks
2.1. Scope of the convergence
2.2. Residential cable, DSL, FTTH
2.3. Enterprise PBX, host-based
2.4. Wireless UMTS, 1xEV-DO, WiMAX
2.5. Challenges and scenarios
3. IP Convergence in Core Networks
3.1. The carrier network challenge
3.2. QoS
3.3. RTP and RTCP
3.4. PSTN and SS7 interworking
4. IP Convergence in Services Networks
4.1. The service network challenge
4.2. The service network competitors
4.2.1. IMS/MMD
4.2.2. P2P (Skype, MS LCS, etc.)
4.3. Supporting technologies/protocols
4.3.1. SIP
4.3.2. H.323
4.3.3. Megaco/H.248
4.4. Deployment and challenges
5. Looking Ahead
5.1. Time frames
5.2. Looking forward
5.3. Summary
6. Putting it all Together
6.1. Exercise 1
126
IP Convergence
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
I
P

C
o
n
v
e
r
g
e
n
c
e
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Exploring IPv6
The roots of the current Internet stretch back over twenty years to its beginnings in academic institutions. The fact
that it has been able to adapt and scale to todays global network is a testament to the solid design principles used in
its creation. However, as the number of Internet nodes continues to grow and new demands are placed on it by
evolving cellular wireless networks, the current IPv4-NAT architecture no longer suffices and we must consider a
transition to an updated protocol. This course explores the IPv6 protocol, which brings not only a vast address space
to address millions of billions of network nodes but also a bag of new tricks. Streamlined and simplified, IPv6
incorporates a number of companion protocols into its core specification. Now, address resolution, security, mobility
solutions, Plug-n-Play, and Quality of Service (QoS) support are unified into the protocol and universally supported
by all IPv6 nodes. This course covers these general topics as well as the adoption of IPv6 in next generation 3GPP
and 3GPP2 wireless services. In conclusion, IPv6s solutions for mobility (Mobile IP) and QoS (a requirement for
next generation wireless networks supporting Internet connectivity and connecting to multimedia applications) are
addressed.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Discuss the different requirements of an IP network
x Analyze the limitations of IPv4 networks
x List the key aspects of IPv6
x Sketch the IPv6 addressing architecture and the new types of
IP addresses
x Describe the Plug-n-Play capabilities of IPv6
x Describe wireless mobility solutions in IPv6
x Identify the impact of IPv6 on related protocols
x Describe the use of IPv6 in 3G wireless networks
Intended Audience
This is an introductory course and does not assume any previous
knowledge of IPv6. It is suitable for wireless professionals who
want to gain an awareness of IPv4s real limitations, the key
issues with IPv6s new capabilities, and how to transition the
networks.
Suggested Prerequisites
x None
Course Length
1 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Introduction
1.1. IP-based networks
1.2. Current state of IPv4
1.3. Key aspects of IPv6
2. IPv6 Headers
2.1. Disadvantages of IPv4 header options
2.2. Extension header
2.3. Routing header
2.4. Destination/Hop-by-hop header
2.5. QoS features
3. IPv6 Addressing Architecture
3.1. Current IPv4 addressing limitations
3.2. Address formats of IPv6
3.3. Multicast addresses
3.4. New address category (Anycast)
3.5. Fragment header
4. Plug n Play Aspects of IPv6
4.1. Host configuration
4.2. Stateless auto-configuration
4.3. Neighbor discovery
4.4. Stateful auto-configuration
5. IPv6 Impact on Other Protocols
5.1. Pseudo header
5.2. DNS for IPv6
5.3. DHCPv6
6. Interworking IPv4 and IPv6
6.1. Impact of IPv4 to IPv6 transition
6.2. Interworking IPv4 and IPv6
6.3. Deployment scenarios of IPv6
7. Wireless Mobility in IPv6
7.1. Mobility management essentials
7.2. Mobile IP solution
7.3. IPv6 mobility solution
7.4. Key mobility messages
7.5. IPv6 in 3GPP and 3GPP2
127
IP Convergence
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
I
P

C
o
n
v
e
r
g
e
n
c
e
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Voice and Video over IP Protocols and Technologies
Quad Play (voice, video, data and wireless) is the name of the game for the latest evolution in the communications
industry. IP networks are the base on which these service are converging to deliver rich multimedia services to the
consumer and enterprises. More personnel will be responsible for operating, maintaining and working with IP-
centric networks. This course provides essential knowledge on voice and video services using IP (VoIP) in
communications networks. We begin the course with an overview of the motivation and network architectures of
today and tomorrow. We then provide an end-to-end view of call setup to establish voice and video services over IP
networks. This is followed by an examination of protocols and technologies used in the devices, edge (access)
networks and core networks to provide appropriate QoS. We also discuss interoperability with legacy networks such
as the PSTN and existing wireless networks. The course concludes with an overview of deployment considerations
like Key Performance Indicators (KPI), capacity planning and security for VoIP. The course includes several
exercises to reinforce key objectives. Throughout the course major protocols and technologies such as IP
multicasting, SIP, Megago, IGMP, RTSP, SAP, SDP, RSVP, RTP, RTCP, MPLS, ROHC, etc. are discussed as
appropriate.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course the student will be able to:
x List the motivations of delivering voice and video over IP
x Sketch the changes in network architecture for VoIP
x Outline the steps to setup a VoIP call and a video call
x List and discuss key protocols used in edge (access) networks
x List and discuss key protocols used in core networks
x Describe the requirements of QoS for real-time IP transport
x Sketch QoS solutions for voice & video in IP networks
x Analyze the interworking of VoIP with legacy networks
x Discuss authentication and authorization for VoIP
x Identify access independent (core) functions
x Identify access dependent functions
x List security threats and solutions for VoIP networks
x Identify Key Performance Indicators (KPI) for VoIP
x Analyze capacity planning
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those familiar with circuit-switched
networks, IP-based data networks and wireless networks.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Welcome to IP Networking (eLearning)
Course Length
2 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Introduction
1.1. The convergence of communications
1.2. Motivation for VoIP
1.3. Network architecture
1.3.1.Today tomorrow
1.3.2.Soft Switch IMS
1.4. Key requirements:
2. Setting up a Call: Voice and Video over IP
2.1. Voice over IP call flow
2.1.1.Authentication
2.1.2.Authorization/admission control
2.1.3.QoS negotiation
2.1.4.Traffic flow monitoring
2.2. Video over IP call flow
2.3. SIP & SDP basics
3. QoS Requirements and Solutions
3.1. Carrier grade QoS and challenges
3.1.1. Voice/video quality, packet loss
3.1.2. Delay and jitter
3.2. Possible solutions
3.2.1.Over engineer
3.2.2.ATM/IP/MPLS
3.2.3.Intserv/diffserv
3.2.4.Adapting QoS
3.3. Intra-domain and Inter-domain QoS
3.3.1.SLAs
4. User Traffic Operations
4.1. Device traffic operations
4.1.1.Voice/video coding
4.1.2.Jitter handling
4.2. Edge network traffic operations
4.2.1.Header compression
4.2.2.Intserv-RSVP
4.3. Core network traffic operations
4.3.1.Diffserv
4.4. QoS policy enforcement
5. Interworking with Other Networks
5.1. Architecture and media gateways
5.2. SS7 signaling and IP
5.3. Megaco
5.4. End-to-end call set up with PSTN
5.5. Call setup for other edge network types
6. Deployment Considerations
6.1. Key performance indicators
6.2. Capacity planning
6.3. Security
6.3.1.Threats/solutions
128
IP Convergence
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
I
P

C
o
n
v
e
r
g
e
n
c
e
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Exploring MPLS
One of the key challenges for the Internet is how to evolve into a network that supports millions of users and a host
of wide ranging applications. The Internet has to evolve on many fronts with regard to routing, QoS, addressing,
efficiency and security. Multi Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) belongs to the group of technologies designed to
achieve this evolution. MPLS is designed to make the Internet fast, scalable, manageable, carry heavy traffic,
support QoS and support new routing architectures. This course is designed for those who need to understand how
to deploy and manage MPLS networks. The course consists of two parts: The first part is the MPLS technology
aspects that deal with MPLS concepts, terminology, and signaling protocols We then cover MPLS applications such
as IP-VPN, Layer 2 VPN, QoS, Traffic Engineering, and Voice over MPLS. These concepts and applications are
explained with examples. Finally, the course gives an overview of G-MPLS to provide a glimpse into the future of
MPLS.
Learning Objectives
x Explore the benefits and rationale for MPLS
x Learn about the relevant standards bodies, major industry
players and history of MPLS
x Explore the MPLS architecture, terminology and concepts
x Understand the MPLS signaling protocols such as LDP,
RSVP, CR-LDP, and RSVP-TE
x Understand the interworking of MPLS with ATM
x Understand how MPLS can be used to provide IP-VPN and
Layer 2 VPN solutions
x Learn how MPLS can be used to deploy IP QoS solutions
including IntServ and DiffServ
x Understand how Traffic Engineering (TE) operations are
executed in an MPLS network
x Understand the evolution of MPLS
Intended Audience
This course is appropriate for technical audiences that wish to
understand the benefits that MPLS offers, its network architecture
and options for signaling, and the major applications that it
supports.
Prerequisites
x ATM and IP Fundamentals (Instructor led)
Course Length
2 days Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Introduction
1.1. Evolving Internet
1.2. IP routing protocols (RIP, BGP, OSPF)
1.3. Forwarding techniques
1.4. Label Switching
2. Why Use MPLS?
2.1. New demands on backbone networks
2.2. Issues with IP over ATM
2.3. MPLS standards bodies
3. MPLS Networks
3.1. MPLS domain
3.2. Network components (LER, LSR)
3.3. Label Switched Path (LSP)
3.4. Forward Equivalence Class (FEC)
4. MPLS Labels
4.1. Label structure
4.2. Shim headers
4.3. Label Forwarding Information Base
4.4. Label binding and distribution concepts
5. LSP Operations
5.1. Hop-by-hop routed LSPs
5.2. Explicit routed LSPs
5.3. LSP setup examples
6. MPLS Protocols
6.1. Label Distribution Protocol (LDP)
6.2. Label distribution scenario with RSVP
6.3. BGP for label distribution
7. MPLS in ATM Networks
7.1. Mapping MPLS to ATM VPI/VCIs
7.2. MPLS over ATM scenario
8. MPLS and QoS
8.1. LSP with RSVP
8.2. Differentiated Services
8.3. DSCPs and PHBs
8.4. E-LSPs and L-LSPs
9. MPLS VPNs
9.1. VPN Solutions and associated issues
9.2. Use of MPLS in VPNs
10. MPLS and Traffic Engineering
10.1. Goals of TE and MPLS solution
10.2. Fast re-route
11. Other Applications
11.1. Voice over MPLS
11.2. Pseudowires
12. MPLS and Optical Networks
12.1. Multiprotocol lambda switching
12.2. Optical control and data planes
12.3. G-MPLS
129
IP Convergence
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
I
P

C
o
n
v
e
r
g
e
n
c
e
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
SIP Signaling
The Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) technology is a flexible and extensible protocol for making, changing, and
terminating data sessions between one or more participants. SIP has been adopted by many wireless and wireline
telecommunications providers. While the basic operations of the protocol are simple and straightforward, its level of
sophistication and functional richness warrant a detailed analysis.
This course provides an overview of the SIP architecture. It also gives a detailed discussion of the proper usage for
SIP messages and headers, the different types of SIP servers and the various protocol extensions that have been
proposed. SIP Signaling for various call processing operations such as registration, call setup, presence,
conferencing, etc. are covered in detail. Furthermore, this course discusses using SIP to offer services such as VoIP
and Instant Messaging. This course also examines security in SIP networks including authentication, encryption, and
interaction with both firewalls and network address translation (NAT). The course discusses several services suited
to SIP and their associated signaling flows.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Explain the motivation for SIP
x Describe the components of the SIP architecture
x Explain the SIP protocol and operations for session
establishment, changes, and termination.
x Give the correct syntax for and explain the proper use of
SIPs request and response messages
x Differentiate stateless, stateful and forking proxy servers
x Describe key SIP operations including registration and
routing
x Recognize how SIP interacts with other significant signaling
protocols
x Explain security issues like encryption and authentication
x Discuss solutions to firewall and NAT traversal
x Describe the interworking with PSTN for VoIP
x Dissect SIP traces for typical SIP services including VoIP,
IM, and internet games
Intended Audience
This in-depth course addresses the needs of technical
professionals who will be deploying SIP architectures and
services. This includes network and systems engineers,
verification engineers, operations personnel, and SIP Applcation
developers.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Session Initiation Protocol (eLearning)
x Voice and Video over IP (VoIP) Overview (eLearning)
Course Length
2 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Introduction to SIP
1.1. History and Development
1.2. Standards for SIP
1.2.1. IETF Development
1.2.2. Current State of Standards
1.2.3. Design Considerations
2. SIP Architecture
2.1. User Agents
2.2. B2BUA
2.3. Proxy and Redirect Servers
2.4. The role of DNS
2.5. Registrar and Location services
2.6. Peer-to-peer
2.7. Service Provider End-to-end Architecture
3. SIP Protocol and Basic Operations
3.1. Transactions, dialogs & sessions
3.2. Message formats
3.3. Session Description Protocol (SDP)
3.4. The SDP offer/answer model
3.5. SIP Transport Options
3.6. Basic session establishment
3.7. Session establishment with preconditions
3.8. Media transport using RTP or RTSP
4. Key SIP Operations
4.1. Common headers
4.2. Address of Record & Contact address
4.3. Registration & De-Registration
4.4. The routing of requests & responses
4.5. Capability discovery
4.6. Signaling Compression
5. Events and Presence
5.1. Events and event packages
5.2. Presence architecture
5.3. SUBSCRIBE and NOTIFY methods
6. SIP Security
6.1. Digest & Proxy Authentication
6.2. Encryption & Privacy
6.3. Firewall & NAT traversal
6.3.1. STUN, ALG, ICE, UPnP
7. SIP Services Examples and Exercises
7.1. VoIP
7.2. Instant Messaging (IM)
7.3. Real-time Internet Games
7.4. Voicemail/IVR
7.5. Conferencing
130
IP Convergence
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
I
P

C
o
n
v
e
r
g
e
n
c
e
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Exploring IMS
Internet Protocol Multimedia Services (IMS) is an access-independent service control architecture that enables
multimedia services to end users via Internet-based protocols. Expertise on IMS is essential for communication
professionals to successfully develop and deploy new multimedia services that are IMS-based. This course provides
an overview of the IMS architecture including functions of nodes, key protocols and end-to-end operations for
services using IMS. It begins with a discussion of the motivation behind IMS and its key benefits and capabilities.
Enabling technologies and protocols such as SIP, Megaco, RTP and IPv6 and the use of these technologies within
the IMS architecture are explored. A discussion of Quality of Service (QoS) follows, with a presentation of
scenarios associated with QoS. We then discuss end-to-end call set up scenarios to explore how IMS enables new
services such as a basic VoIP call, multimedia conferencing as well as service portability and mobility. We also
discuss how IMS provides key building blocks such as location, presence, authentication, and resource sharing for
newer services. We highlight the challenges and solutions associated with security in IMS networks. This is
followed by a discussion on how multimedia services are deployed without IMS in todays networks. We conclude
with a discussion on IMS deployment and evolution. Please note that this course does not cover any specific access technology.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x List the motivation, benefits and challenges associated with IMS
x Sketch IMS network architecture
x List the functions of the key nodes in IMS architectures
x Describe how IMS provides building blocks such as presence,
location, subscriber management, authentication
x Explain functions of key protocols such as SIP, Megaco,
DIAMETER, RTP, RTCP, RSVP
x Explain how IMS provides and manages QoS needs for different
services
x Explain how IMS provides portability and mobility independent of
access
x Sketch the end-to-end service establishment flows for VoIP and
multimedia conference service
x List security challenges associated with IMS
x Discuss security solutions to deal with the challenges
x Depict scenarios that illustrate interworking with legacy telephone
networks
x Compare IMS-based services and non-IMS-based services (e.g.
VoIP)
Intended Audience
This course is intended to provide a technical overview of the
IMS. It is appropriate for all technical personnel as well as those
in product management, technical sales, planning, architecture,
design, deployment and support.
Suggested Prerequisites
x IP Convergence Essentials (Instructor led)
x Overview of IMS (eLearning)
Course Length
2 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Introduction
1.1. Big picture of converged networks
1.2. Motivation and benefits of IMS
2. IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) Architecture
2.1. Reference and architecture diagram
2.1.1. UE, AS, CSCF, MGCF, HSS
2.2. Components and functions
2.3. Interfaces and protocols
2.4. Addressing in IMS
2.5. Basic VoIP call scenario in IMS
2.6. Registration
2.7. Call origination and termination
3. IMS Signaling Protocols
3.1. SIP and SDP
3.2. MEGACO
3.3. Real Time Protocol (RTP)
3.4. Real Time Control Protocol (RTCP)
4. Mobility in IMS
4.1. Mobility within IMS domain
4.2. Mobility between IMS and Non-IMS
domain
5. Quality of Service in IMS
5.1. End-to-end QoS architecture
5.2. QoS protocols (COPS, DIAMETER, RSVP,
DiffServ)
5.3. QoS allocation scenarios
6. IMS Services and Building Blocks
6.1. Service architecture and role of application
servers
6.2. Subscriber profiles and triggers
7. Security in IMS
7.1. Key security challenges
7.1.1. DOS, ID theft, eavesdropping
7.2. Solutions to deal with the challenges
8. Deployment and Evolution
8.1. Deployment issues
8.2. Whats next for IMS
9. Exercise: Putting it All Together
131
IP Convergence
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
I
P

C
o
n
v
e
r
g
e
n
c
e
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
IMS in UMTS Networks
UMTS (WCDMA) creates a platform to converge the different worlds of voice and data services to create a global
market for mobile multimedia. This two-day course is intended for those seeking an overview of UMTS vision for
the next generation All-IP multimedia networks known as IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS). This course provides an
overview of the various concepts used in IMS architecture, functions, components and interfaces. Enabling
technologies such as SIP, MEGACO and IPv6 and the use of these technologies within the IMS architecture will be
studied. This course also explains the motivation behind this architecture and system flows using various
components. A discussion of Quality of Service (QoS) follows, with a presentation of key protocols and the
scenarios associated with QoS. This course includes the discussion on IMS services like Presence, Group
Management and Messaging. This course explains the principles of making IMS access agnostic. Voice Call
Continuity (VCC) between IMS and a circuit switched environment will be studied. It concludes with a brief
discussion on transition from R99 to IMS.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x List the driving forces, requirements and goals of the UMTS
Core Networks
x Describe the building blocks that will be used to construct the
Release 5 IMS Core Networks
x List the functions of the UMTS Release 5 IMS architectures
x Explain the signaling and transport protocols like SIP, BICC,
Megaco and RTP
x Sketch the end-to-end service establishment flows in the
Release 5 IMS architecture
x Depict scenarios that illustrate interworking with the PSTN
and legacy wireless networks
x Identify various services that are supported in Release 6
x Describe how Session Border Controller enables access of a
common IMS network with different access technologies like
CDMA 200, WiMAX etc
x Explain Voice Call Continuity (VCC) which enables an IMS
subscriber on a VoIP call to continue the call into a circuit switched
environment.
x Explain how functions such as mobility, roaming and call
processing are carried out in the new architecture
Intended Audience
This course is intended to provide a technical overview of the
UMTS IMS Core Networks. It is appropriate for all technical
personnel, including those in product management, planning,
architecture, design and deployment.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Exploring UMTS (WCDMA) (Instructor led)
Course Length
2 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Introduction
1.1. Overview of Next Generation Wireless
Networks
1.2. VoIP and related services in UMTS
2. IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) Architecture
2.1. Reference and architecture diagram
2.2. Components and functions
2.3. Interfaces and protocols
2.4. Addressing in IMS
3. IMS Signaling Protocols
3.1. SIP and SDP
3.2. MEGACO
3.3. Use of SIP and MEGACO in UMTS IMS
3.4. Real Time Protocol (RTP)
3.5. Real Time Control Protocol (RTCP)
4. IMS Scenarios & Operations
4.1. Registration
4.2. Call origination and termination
4.3. Roaming and handovers
5. Mobility in IMS
5.1. Mobility within IMS domain
5.2. Mobility between IMS and Non-IMS
domain
6. IMS Quality of Service
6.1. End-to-end QoS architecture
6.2. QoS protocols (RSVP, DiffServ)
6.3. QoS allocation scenarios
7. IMS Services
7.1. Service architecture and role of Application
Servers
7.2. Subscriber profiles and triggers
8. Enhancements of R6
8.1. New Services
8.2. Presence
8.3. Lawful Intercept
8.4. Group Management
8.5. QoS Enhancements
8.6. Session Border Controller
9. Enhancements of R7
9.1. Voice Call Continuity
9.2. Architecture
9.3. Scenarios
10. Transitioning from R99 to IMS
10.1. Evolution to IMS core networks
132
IP Convergence
Instructor led
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
I
P

C
o
n
v
e
r
g
e
n
c
e
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
VoIP and SIP in 1x/1xEV-DO MMD Networks
The transmission of voice over packet data networks represents a radical shift for wireless networks. Issues related
to Quality of Service (QoS) and security rise in importance as wireless service providers seek to provide Voice over
IP (VoIP) services. Service providers are enhancing their networks to support VoIP and multimedia services using
IP Multimedia networks. The Multimedia Domain (MMD) focuses on multimedia service delivery, and is a
significant evolution of the CDMA core network. MMD promotes interoperability among wireline, cellular, WLAN
and other types of networks. This course illustrates how VoIP and related services are supported using the Session
Initiation Protocol (SIP) in 1x/1xEV-DO Multimedia Domain (MMD) networks, including the IP Multimedia
Subsystem (IMS). In addition, it provides students with an understanding of enabling protocols such as SIP, SDP,
Megaco, and DIAMETER. Various call scenarios such as registration, deregistration, call origination and
termination, session renegotiation, accounting and charging, and QoS management are also explored.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Sketch a network diagram for VoIP service
x List the driving forces, requirements and goals of the IP
MMD in 1x/1xEV-DO networks
x Identify the building blocks used to construct MMD
x List the functions of the MMD architecture that support
multimedia functions
x Describe how SIP and related protocols are used in the MMD
network to support VoIP
x Explain how functions such as mobility, roaming and call
processing are performed in the new architecture
x Step through end-to-end service establishment flows in the IP
architecture
x Describe how 1x and 1xEV-DO networks have evolved to
take advantage of MMD
x Sketch scenarios that illustrate interworking with the PSTN,
WLAN and legacy wireless networks
Intended Audience
This overview course is primarily intended for product
management, planners, architects and designers who need an
overview of VoIP, SIP and IP multimedia networks in 1x/1xEV-
DO.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Mastering 1x Networks and Signaling (Instructor led)
x 1xEV-DO Networks (eLearning)
Course Length
3 day Instructor led
Course Outline
1. Introduction to Voice over IP
1.1. VoIP Perspectives: Consumer, enterprise
and service providers
1.2. Network architecture for VoIP
2. SIP Signaling and Related Operations
2.1. SIP architecture components
2.2. Session Description Protocol (SDP)
2.3. Registration and call setup
2.4. SIP Features
3. Multimedia Domain (MMD) in 1x/1xEV-DO
3.1. Motivation for IP multimedia networks
3.2. Reference architecture and role of CSCF
3.3. Interfaces and protocols
4. Registration in MMD/IMS
4.1. Registration and authentication
4.2. Roles of P-CSCF, S-CSCF and HSS
5. Basic Call Scenarios in MMD/IMS
5.1. Call origination and termination
5.2. Session renegotiation
5.3. Mobile-to-Mobile & Mobile-to-PSTN
6. Accounting in MMD/IMS
6.1. Charging concepts and terminology
6.2. Offline and online charging
7. Multimedia Transport Mechanism
7.1. Real-time traffic management
7.2. Voice coding techniques
7.3. RTP and RTCP
8. VoIP/IP Telephony in 1xEV-DO
8.1. Service-based bearer control
8.2. Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF)
8.3. QoS in 1xEV-DO
8.4. Header compression techniques
8.5. Multi-flow RLP and Multi-user packets
9. Interworking
9.1. Interworking with PSTN and WLAN
10. MMD Services
10.1. Push-to-Talk (PTT or PoC)
10.2. Presence and messaging
10.3. Conferencing
11. Voice Call Continuity
11.1. VCC network architecture
11.2. Registration and call operations
11.3. Domain selection
11.4. Domain transfer
12. Security in MMD/IMS
12.1. MMD security architecture
12.2. Role of IPSec and TLS
12.3. Firewall & NAT traversal
133
IP Convergence
Self-paced eLearning
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
I
P

C
o
n
v
e
r
g
e
n
c
e
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Welcome to IP Networking
As the wireless industry transitions to 3G wireless networks supporting higher data rate packet data services, a solid
understanding of IP networking is as essential as a dial tone is to a wireline telephone. A fundamental knowledge of
IP Networking is a MUST for all wireless professionals. This course provides an introduction to IP networking and
its use in wireless networks. It begins with an introduction to IP networking services such as the web, email and
VPN to illustrate the value and ubiquitousness of IP networks. The IP network architecture, the functions provided
by various components and the role of key protocols are then described. This course also introduces various IP
network security technologies and examines how they are deployed to secure IP networks. This course provides a
brief introduction to IPv6 features and its interworking with IPv4, and concludes with a discussion of how GPRS
and 1x networks take advantage of IP networks.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Define the components of IP networks
x List the applications that use IP networks and learn how these
applications are deployed in IP networks
x Describe the commonly employed protocols in an IP network
x Describe the key features and limitations of IP
x Describe security in IP networks
x Illustrate how 1x and GPRS data networks use IP networks
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking an introduction to
IP Networking and how it is used in wireless networks.
Complementary Courses
x The Wireless Landscape: Beyond 3G (Instructor led)
x Wireless Internet - From IP to EDGE & UMTS/HSPA
(Instructor led)
Average Course Length
2 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
Applications in IP Networks
x Email
x Web browsing
x IP telephony
x Internet, Intranet, Extranet
x VPN
IP Network Architecture
x IP network architecture
x Role of key components of Internet
IP Networking Protocols and their roles
x Role of key protocols in IP network
Key Characteristics of IP
x Address types
x Different versions of IP
x Limitations of IP
x Key features of IPv6
Security in IP Networks
x Security mechanisms in IP networks
End-to-End Example Scenario
x Access IP services using a mobile
Summary
Put It All Together
x Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course
134
IP Convergence
Self-paced eLearning
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
I
P

C
o
n
v
e
r
g
e
n
c
e
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Overview of MPLS
One of the key challenges for the Internet is how to evolve into a network that supports millions of users and a host
of wide-ranging applications. The Internet has to evolve on many fronts including routing, QoS, addressing,
efficiency and security. Multi Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) belongs to the group of technologies designed to
achieve this goal. MPLS is designed to make the Internet fast, scalable and manageable, and capable of carrying
heavy traffic, supporting QoS and new routing architectures. This course presents a technical overview of MPLS
including a detailed discussion on the architecture of MPLS, the components of the MPLS network and the
supporting protocols required for MPLS. Operational issues of MPLS and issues related to interworking MPLS with
ATM are also explored. This course explains how MPLS may be used to support Virtual Private Networks (VPN)
and Traffic Engineering (TE). What are the next steps of MPLS? The course ends with a discussion of G-MPLS,
which is the evolution of MPLS.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Explain the reason for MPLS
x Recognize the limitations of ATM
x Describe how MPLS performs fast routing
x Sketch the architecture of MPLS
x Describe the important components and operations of MPLS
x Explain the protocols used in MPLS
x Describe how MPLS is used to set up layer 3 and layer 2
VPNs
x Explain how MPLS is used in traffic engineering
x Identify the next steps for MPLS including G-MPLS
Intended Audience
This course is intended for anyone seeking an overview of MPLS,
its features and capabilities.
Suggested Prerequisites
x None
Average Course Length
3 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
Prologue
x Introduction to MPLS
x Motivation for MPLS
Current state of IP networks
x Limitations of IP networks
x Issues with IP over ATM solutions
Why MPLS?
x MPLS and fast routing
x MPLSs improvements of the Internet
MPLS Networks and Terminology
x Label Edge Router
x Label Switch Router
x Forward Equivalency Class
x Label Switched Paths (LSP)
MPLS Operations
x LSP establishment
x Hop-by-hop routed LSPs and explicit
routed LSPs
x Label Swapping and Label Popping
x Label Stacking
x LDP, RSVP and other MPLS protocols
MPLS and Virtual Private Networks
x VPNs support in MPLS
x Layer 3 and Layer 2 VPNs establishment
in MPLS
MPLS and Traffic Engineering
x Introduction to traffic engineering
x MPLS traffic engineering procedures
Evolution of MPLS
x New applications
x Generalized MPLS
Summary
Put It All Together
x Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course
135
IP Convergence
Self-paced eLearning
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
I
P

C
o
n
v
e
r
g
e
n
c
e
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Multiple Antenna Technologies
Advanced multiple antenna technologies enable emerging 4G cellular technologies to achieve superior data rates
over the air interface (e.g., in excess of 100 Mbps). While 4G networks utilize an efficient multiple access technique
called OFDMA (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access), OFDMA on its own cannot deliver the expected
superior throughput in 4G systems. Multiple antenna techniques play a critical role in increasing spectral efficiency.
This course provides fundamental knowledge of numerous multiple antenna techniques that will be an integral part
of emerging radio access standards. The antenna basics are explained, along with typical antenna configurations in
commercial cellular deployments. Major antenna techniques covered in the course include transmit/receiver
diversity techniques such as space-time coding (STC), beamforming techniques such as an adaptive beamforming
system, multiple input multiple output (MIMO) spatial multiplexing techniques, and space/spatial division multiple
access (SDMA). In summary, this course provides a strong foundation for advanced antenna technologies.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Outline key benefits and challenges of multiple antenna
techniques
x Provide examples of various types of multiple antenna
techniques
x Explain transmit and receive diversity techniques such as
Space Time Coding and antenna grouping
x Contrast a switched-beam system with an adaptive
beamforming technique
x Describe MIMO- Spatial Multiplexing techniques
x Discuss the implementation of SDMA
x Give examples of the multiple antenna techniques defined in
emerging 4G cellular networks
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a fundamental
understanding of how various multiple antenna techniques work.
This includes those in a design, test, systems engineering, sales
engineering, network engineering, or verification role.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Overview of 3G Wireless Networks (eLearning)
Complementary Courses
x Overview of OFDM (eLearning)
Average Course Length
3 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
Introduction to Antenna Techniques
x Antenna basics: transmit and receive
operation, antenna parameters, and
antenna gain characteristics
x Motivation for advanced antenna
techniques
x Example of antenna configurations: omni
and sectorized systems, 1 transmit and 1
receive antenna, 1 transmit and 2 receive
antennas with space and polarization
diversity
x Summary of multiple antenna techniques,
including advantages and challenges
Transmit and Receive Diversity Techniques
x Basic techniques (space, time, and
frequency)
x Advanced transmit diversity techniques
including STC, frequency/space, and
antenna grouping/selection
x Receive diversity
Beamforming Techniques
x Construction of a beam
x Transmit and receive beamforming
x Switched-beam system
x Adaptive beamforming system
x Benefits and challenges of beamforming
MIMO- Spatial Multiplexing
x Basics of spatial multiplexing
x Horizontal and vertical encoding, single-
code word and multi-code word
x MIMO Transmitter and Receiver
Examples
x Closed-loop MIMO (MIMO + precoding)
x Collaborative spatial multiplexing
x Benefits and challenges of MIMO-SM
Summary
Put It All Together
x Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the course objectives
136
IP Convergence
Self-paced eLearning
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
I
P

C
o
n
v
e
r
g
e
n
c
e
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
IP Convergence Overview
As wireless and wireline networks mature, data usage increases, and network infrastructure and services become
more IP-centric, more personnel will be responsible for managing and working with IP-centric networks. A solid
understanding of IP and data communications will be essential for personnel at all levels to be effective in a data-
oriented environment. This course provides the background and concepts to understand the motivations of networks
converging toward IP. It discusses the challenges of transport of media (voice and video) using IP (VoIP) as the
transport service in telecommunication networks. It presents the unique flavor of this challenge from the perspective
of the three basic types of network for the telecommunications world access networks, core networks, and services
network.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course the student will be able to:
x List the key motivations for voice and video over IP
x Define IP convergence
x Describe the use of IP as transport in access networks
x Discuss the use of IP as transport in core networks and the
associated major technologies
x Outline the use of IP as transport in services networks and the
associated major technologies
x Explain the possible evolution paths of networks today
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a high level
understanding of the convergence toward IP-centric networks.
This includes those in sales, marketing, project management,
technical management, and executive management.
Suggested Prerequisites
x None
Average Course Length
1 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
State of the Industry
x Defining IP convergence
x Motivations for convergence
Quad play
OPEX
Other converged services
x What are voice and video over IP?
x Where is the industry going?
x Markets and regulatory environment
x Discontinuities?
x Common approaches in networks
IP Convergence in Access Networks
x Scope of the convergence
x Residential cable, DSL, FTTH
x Enterprise PBX, host-based
x Wireless UMTS, 1xEV-DO, WiMAX
x Challenges and scenarios
IP Convergence in Core Networks
x The carrier network challenge
x QoS
x RTP and RTCP
x PSTN and SS7 interworking
IP Convergence in Services Networks
x The Service network challenge
x The Service network competitors
IMS/MMD
P2P (Skype, MS LCS, etc.)
x Supporting technologies/protocols
SIP
H.323
Megaco/H.248
x Deployment and challenges
Looking Ahead
x Time frames
x Looking forward
Summary
Put it all Together
x Exercise 1
137
IP Convergence
Self-paced eLearning
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
I
P

C
o
n
v
e
r
g
e
n
c
e
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Overview of IMS
The Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) is a significant core network evolution that uses common
Internet-based protocols to provide global, access-independent and standard-based IP connectivity and service
control. The IMS architecture is a key enabler of various types of multimedia services to end-users. IMS helps
provide a network that fulfills the promise of all-IP networks, allowing a combination of real-time and non- real-
time services to be delivered to a single device. IMS is access network independent and, hence, promotes
interoperability between wireline, cellular, WLAN, CATV, FTTH and other types of access networks. This course
explores the various concepts used in the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) including architecture, network
components and interfaces. It also gives the student an understanding of the enabling technologies such as SIP,
SDP, MEGACO and DIAMETER, and the use of these technologies within the IP Multimedia architecture. The IP
Multimedia call model, call control protocols, signaling and end-to-end message flow are also covered.
Please note that this course does not cover any specific access technology.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x List the driving forces, requirements and goals of the IP
Multimedia Subsystem (IMS)
x Identify the building blocks used to construct the IMS
x Describe the functions of the IMS architecture that support
multimedia functions
x Explain the roles of SIP, MEGACO, DIAMETER, and the enabling
technologies used in the architecture
x Describe how functions such as mobility, and call processing are
carried out in the new architecture
x Explain end-to-end service establishment flows in the IMS
architecture
x Describe scenarios that illustrate interworking with the PSTN
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a high level
understanding of the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS). This
includes those in sales and marketing, product planning, product
management, design, integration, verification and deployment.
Suggested Prerequisites
x IP Convergence Overview (eLearning)
Average Course Length
3 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
Motivation for IMS
x Circuit and packet domains of existing
networks
x Key goals for IMS
x IMS service examples
IMS Architecture
x Architecture reference model
x Components and functions
x Interfaces and protocols
x Addressing in IMS
x Traffic and Signaling
Overview of Relevant Protocols
x Role of SIP and SDP
x MGCP and MEGACO
x Use of SIP and MEGACO in IMS
x Role of DIAMETER
IMS Call Scenarios
x Registration
x Call origination and termination
Interworking
x Interoperability between PSTN and IMS
Summary
Put It All Together
x Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course
138
IP Convergence
Self-paced eLearning
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
I
P

C
o
n
v
e
r
g
e
n
c
e
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Voice and Video over IP (VoIP) Overview
Quad Play (Voice, Video, Data, and Wireless) is the name for the latest evolution in the communications industry.
These disparate services are converging on IP-based networks to deliver rich multimedia services to the consumer
and enterprises. Since more people will be responsible for operating, maintaining and working with IP-centric
networks, this course provides the essential information on Voice and Video services using IP (VoIP) in modern
communications networks. We begin the course with a look at the motivation for change and the network
architectures of today and tomorrow. We move on to provide an end-to-end view of the call setups that establish
Voice and Video services over IP networks. This is followed by a high-level examination of the underlying
protocols and technologies used in the devices, the edge (access) networks, and the core networks that provide
appropriate Quality of Service (QoS). We also discuss interoperability with legacy networks such as the PSTN, and
existing wireless networks. The course concludes with an overview of some deployment considerations like security
for VoIP.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course the student will be able to:
x List the motivations of delivering voice and video over IP
x Outline the steps to setup a VoIP call and a video call
x List key protocols used in edge (access) networks
x List key protocols used in core networks
x Describe the QoS requirements for real-time IP transport
x Analyze the interworking of VoIP with legacy networks
x Discuss authentication and authorization for VoIP
x Identify access-independent (core) functions
x Identify access-dependent (access) functions
x List security threats and solutions for VoIP networks
x Identify Key Performance Indicators (KPI) for VoIP
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a high-level
understanding of VoIP in its voice and video renditions as well as
those seeking an orderly exposure to the buzz words and
acronyms. The intended audience includes those in sales,
marketing, product planning, product documentation, product
management, system design and integration, and application
verification and deployments.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Welcome to IP Networking
Average Course Length
3 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
Introduction
x Motivation for VoIP
x Network architecture
Today Tomorrow
x Key requirements
Setting up a call: Voice and Video over IP
x Voice over IP call flow
Authentication
Authorization/admission control
QoS negotiation
Monitoring traffic flow
x Video over IP call flow
x SIP & SDP basics
QoS requirements and solutions
x QoS Challenges
Voice/Video quality, packet loss
Delay and jitter
x Possible solutions
x Intra-domain and inter-domain QoS
SLAs
User traffic operations
x Device traffic operations
x Edge network traffic operations
x Core network traffic operations
x QoS Policy enforcement
Interworking with other networks
x Architecture and media gateways
x SS7 Signaling and IP
x Megaco
x End-to-end call set up with PSTN
Deployment considerations
x Key Performance Indicators
x Security
Threats
Solutions
Summary
Put it all Together
139
IP Convergence
Self-paced eLearning
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
I
P

C
o
n
v
e
r
g
e
n
c
e
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
IP Quality of Service
The Internet was designed to be simple. Therefore, each application should have a simple routing mechanism and no
differentiation of Quality of Service (QoS) (i.e., one size fits all). The Internet is coming to a new age where various
applications have their own QoS requirements, and one size definitely does not fit all. This course introduces the
concept of QoS and discusses the current limitations within the Internet. The new services requirements driving QoS
in the Internet are presented. The two basic techniques used for QoS - Integrated Services and Differentiated
Services - are presented. The discussion includes the benefits and limitations of the Integrated Services and the
Differentiated Services approaches to QoS. While IntServ and DiffServ are the approaches, service providers need
an infrastructure to deploy QoS-based applications rapidly. This course describes the policy-based QoS architecture
which supports the infrastructure for delivering QoS based applications. Finally, emerging trends in IP QoS are
introduced.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Determine the limitations of the best effort approach to QoS
x Describe the need for QoS with respect to new applications
x Explain how QoS requirements are communicated
x Define policy-based architecture
x Explain the benefits and limitations of the Integrated Services
approach to QoS
x Explain the benefits and limitations of the Differentiated
Services approach to QoS
x Describe the protocols that are used for each of the QoS
approaches
x Identify emerging trends in IP QoS
Intended Audience
This course is intended for anyone seeking an overview of the IP
Quality of Service architectures in the Internet.
Suggested Prerequisites
x None
Average Course Length
3 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
Motivation for Quality of Service (QoS)
x Definition of Quality of Service
x Service examples
x QoS parameters
QoS in todays Internet
x Current QoS mechanisms
x Limitations of the current QoS
mechanisms
QoS Requirements
x Requirements of QoS on the Internet
x Service Level Agreements (SLAs)
x Challenges for deploying IP QoS
x Policy based QoS architecture
QoS Models
x Application approach vs. aggregated
approach
x Introduction to IP QoS models
Integrated Services Approach (IntServ)
x Integrated Service approach
x Limitations of the Integrated Services
approach
x ReSerVation Protocol (RSVP)
Differentiated Services Approach (DiffServ)
x Differentiated Services approach
x DiffServ protocol
x DiffServ implementation
x Traffic management functions
x Issues with DiffServ
Emerging Trends in QoS
x Hybrid architectures
x Automated QoS management
x Bandwidth brokers
Summary
Put It All Together
x Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course
140
IP Convergence
Self-paced eLearning
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
I
P

C
o
n
v
e
r
g
e
n
c
e
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Session Initiation Protocol
The Internet has become the single network that provides universal connectivity around the world. Currently, the
Internet is used for a multitude of services such as email, Web surfing and eCommerce. One of the new and exciting
uses of the Internet is to provide voice and multimedia services. A protocol must exist to establish these voice and
multimedia calls. This course discusses the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP). SIP was developed by the Internet
Engineering Task Force (IETF) to establish voice and multimedia calls through the Internet. SIP is designed to
establish voice calls as well as any connection between two or more parties. This connection can vary from simple
Instant Messaging to more complex multimedia sessions. The messaging and architecture of SIP are explained in
detail including the key contents of the messages and the key components of the architecture. The concepts of SIP
are solidified with the presentation of a series of multimedia service establishment examples.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Determine the motivation for a consolidated voice and data
network
x Describe the challenges of a consolidated network
x Define the term softswitch and its usage
x Describe how SIP will be used to establish everything from
voice calls to multimedia sessions
x Explain how SIP is being extended to provide additional
capabilities
x Demonstrate the use and flexibility of the Session
Description Protocol
Intended Audience
This course is intended for anyone seeking an overview of SIP, its
features and capabilities.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Welcome to IP Networking (eLearning)
Average Course Length
3 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
Motivation for Voice over IP networks
x Motivation for consolidating voice and
data
x Benefits of a consolidated network
x Challenges of a consolidated network
SIP Key Features
x Introduction to SIP
x Key characteristics and features of SIP
SIP Architecture
x What is a softswitch?
x Functions and capabilities of SIP servers
SIP Message Structure
x Key components of SIP messages
x Capabilities of the Session Description
Protocol
Examples of session establishment
x Establishment of a voice call
x Establishment of a multimedia session
Summary
Put It All Together
x Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course
141
IP Convergence
Self-paced eLearning
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
I
P

C
o
n
v
e
r
g
e
n
c
e
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Seamless Mobility
Wireless networks have been used to complement wireline networks and have seen widespread adoption in recent
years. Both 3G cellular and WiFi wireless networks have become part of our daily lives by providing broadband
connectivity anywhere, anytime. People want to stay connected with friends and family, with clients and colleagues,
to the information they need, and with the gadgets that keep them engaged. Seamless mobility gives people the
ability to communicate without much thought about the background technology; it is just Always On with
continuity of connection and experience, anywhere, anytime. This course identifies the needs for seamless mobility
and explains how seamless mobility is achieved in different types of wireless networks. It covers various types of
mobility in 3G wireless networks, WiFi networks, Cable/Wired networks and emerging WiMAX networks. This
course provides a review of technologies such as VoIP, IMS/MMD, UMA and Mobile IP that enable the
implementation of seamless mobility vision.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x Describe the reasons for seamless mobility and how it affects
the user experience
x Sketch the seamless mobility architecture
x List the types of mobility required for seamless connectivity
within and across heterogeneous wireless networks
x Describe various mobility technologies and how they come
together to provide seamless mobility
x Explain the methods used by wireless service providers to
provide seamless mobility to their subscribers
x Explain the business landscape and terms such as triple play,
FMC, etc.
Intended Audience
This eLearning course is intended for professionals seeking a
conceptual understanding of seamless mobility.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Mobile IP for CDMA2000 (eLearning)
x GPRS Mobility (eLearning)
x UMTS Mobility (eLearning)
x Session Initiation Protocol (eLearning)
Average Course Length
3 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
Setting the Stage
x What is Seamless Mobility?
x Perspectives of subscriber, enterprise
users, vendors and service providers
Motivation for Seamless Mobility
x Business and technical drivers
x Interoperability & connectivity
Requirements for Seamless Mobility
x Radio, Core and Application mobility
x Voice, data and video in mobile
environment
x Fixed Mobile Convergence (FMC)
Seamless Mobility Evolution Roadmap
x Technology enablers
x Steps toward complete seamless mobility
Seamless Mobility Technologies
x SIP and application level mobility
x Unlicensed Mobile Access (UMA)
x GPRS Mobility Management
x Mobile IP
x IP Multimedia Subsystems (IMS &
MMD)
Converged Networks
x Converged network architecture and
related protocols
Deployment
x Scenarios and challenges
x Key Players
Summary
Put It All Together
x Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course
142
IP Convergence
Self-paced eLearning
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
I
P

C
o
n
v
e
r
g
e
n
c
e
2001-2008 Award Solutions, Inc. Richardson, TX +1.972.664.0727 x306 +1.877.47.AWARD www.awardsolutions.com
Overview of MMD (IMS) in 1x/1xEV-DO
Networks
The Multimedia Domain (MMD) is a significant CDMA core network evolution that emphasizes service delivery.
MMD provides a network that fulfills the promise of 3G, allowing a combination of real-time and non- real-time
services to be delivered to a single device. MMD is access network independent and, hence, promotes
interoperability between wireline, cellular, WLAN and other network types. This course provides an overview of the
IP-based next generation multimedia networks for CDMA2000-based wireless networks. It explores the various
concepts used in an IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) including architecture, network components and interfaces. It
also gives the student an understanding of the enabling technologies such as SIP, SDP, MEGACO and DIAMETER,
and the use of these technologies within the IP Multimedia architecture. The IP Multimedia call model, call control
protocols, signaling and end-to-end message flow are also covered.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
x List the driving forces, requirements and goals of the
Multimedia Domain (MMD) in CDMA2000 networks
x Identify the building blocks used to construct the MMD
x Describe the functions of the MMD architecture that support
multimedia functions
x Explain the roles of SIP, MEGACO, DIAMETER, and the
enabling technologies used in the architecture
x Describe how functions such as mobility, roaming and call
processing are carried out in the new architecture
x Explain end-to-end service establishment flows in the IP
architecture
x Describe scenarios that illustrate interworking with the PSTN
and legacy wireless networks
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a high level
understanding of the Multimedia Domain (MMD) and IP
Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) in 1x/1xEV-DO networks. This
includes those in sales and marketing, product planning, product
management, design, integration, verification and deployment.
Suggested Prerequisites
x Overview of CDMA2000 Networks (eLearning)
x 1xEV-DO Networks (eLearning)
Average Course Length
3 hours of eLearning
Knowledge Knuggets
Motivation for MMD
x Circuit and packet domains of wireless
networks
x Key goals for the multimedia domain
x IMS service examples
MMD Architecture
x Architecture reference model
x Components and functions
x Interfaces and protocols
x Addressing in MMD
x Traffic and Signaling
Overview of Relevant Protocols
x Role of SIP and SDP
x MGCP and MEGACO
x Use of SIP and MEGACO in MMD
x Role of DIAMETER
MMD in 1x/DO Networks
x MMD/IMS in 1x/1xEV-DO networks
x IMS service triggers
MMD Call Scenarios
x Registration
x Call origination and termination
x Roaming and Handoffs
Interworking
x Interoperability between PSTN and IMS
x Interoperability with legacy wireless
networks
Summary
Put It All Together
x Assess the knowledge of the participant
based on the objectives of the course

You might also like